advertisement
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
1
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Trademarks
Copyright © PLANET Technology Corp. 2015.
Contents are subject to revision without prior notice.
PLANET is a registered trademark of PLANET Technology Corp. All other trademarks belong to their respective owners.
Disclaimer
PLANET Technology does not warrant that the hardware will work properly in all environments and applications, and makes no warranty and representation, either implied or expressed, with respect to the quality, performance, merchantability, or fitness for a particular purpose. PLANET has made every effort to ensure that this User's Manual is accurate; PLANET disclaims liability for any inaccuracies or omissions that may have occurred.
Information in this User's Manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of
PLANET. PLANET assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained in this User's Manual. PLANET makes no commitment to update or keep current the information in this User's Manual, and reserves the right to make improvements to this User's Manual and/or to the products described in this User's Manual, at any time without notice.
If you find information in this manual that is incorrect, misleading, or incomplete, we would appreciate your comments and suggestions.
FCC Warning
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the Instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
CE Mark Warning
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Energy Saving Note of the Device
This power required device does not support Standby mode operation. For energy saving, please remove the power cable to disconnect the device from the power circuit. In view of saving the energy and reducing the unnecessary power consumption, it is strongly suggested to remove the power connection for the device if this device is not intended to be active.
WEEE Warning
To avoid the potential effects on the environment and human health as a result of the presence of hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment, end users of electrical and electronic equipment should understand the meaning of the crossed-out wheeled bin symbol. Do not dispose of WEEE as unsorted municipal waste and have to collect such WEEE separately.
Revision
PLANET WGS-managed series User's Manual
FOR MODEL: WGS-804HPT/WGS-4215-8T/WGS-4215-8T2S
REVISION: 1.0 (Sep., 2015)
Part No: EM-WGS-managed series_v1.0
2
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
5
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
6
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
7
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
8
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
9
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
1. INTRODUCTION
Thank you for purchasing PLANET WGS Managed Switch series, which comes with multiple Gigabit Ethernet copper and SFP fiber optic connectibility and robust layer 2 and layer 4 features. The description of this model is shown below:
WGS-804HPT
Industrial 8-Port 10/100/1000T Wall-mount Managed Switch with 4-Port PoE+ (-40~75 degrees C)
WGS-4215-8T
Industrial 8-Port 10/100/1000T Wall-mount Managed Switch (-40~75 degrees C)
WGS-4215-8T2S
Industrial 8-Port 10/100/1000T + 2-Port 100/1000X SFP Wall-mount Managed Switch (-40~75 degrees C)
“Managed Switch” is used as an alternative name in this user’s manual.
1.1 Packet Contents
Open the box of the Managed Switch and carefully unpack it. The box should contain the following items:
Model Name
Item
The Managed Switch
WGS-804HPT
■
WGS-4215-8T
■
WGS-4215-8T2S
■
Quick Installation Guide
3-pin Terminal Block
Connector
Wall-mounted Kit
DIN-rail Kit
Magnet Kit
RJ45 Dust-proof Cap
SFP Dust Caps
■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
8 8 8 x x 2
If any item is found missing or damaged, please contact your local reseller for replacement.
10
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
1.2 Product Description
Easily-deployed and Expanded Network
Designed to be installed in a wall enclosure or simply mounted on a wall at any convenient location, PLANET WGS managed series, an innovative, Industrial Wall-mount Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch, offers IPv6/IPv4 dual stack management,
intelligent Layer 2 management functions, and user-friendly interface. The WGS managed series is able to operate reliably, stably and quietly in any environment without affecting its performance. Featuring ultra networking speed and operating temperature ranging from -40 to 75 degrees C in a compact but rugged IP30 metal housing, the WGS managed series is an ideal solution to meeting the demand for the following network applications:
Building/Home automation network
Internet of things (IoT)
IP surveillance
Wireless LAN
Innovative Wall-mount Installation
The WGS managed series is specially designed to be installed in a narrow environment, such as wall enclosure or electric weak box. The compact, flat and wall-mounted design fits easily in any space-limited location. It adopts the user-friendly “Front
Access” design, making the installing, cable wiring, LED monitoring and maintenance of the wall-mount managed switch placed in an enclosure very convenient for technicians. The WGS managed series can be installed by fixed wall mounting, magnetic
wall mounting or DIN rail, thereby making its usability more flexible.
Dual Power Input for High Availability Network System
The WGS managed series features a strong dual power input system incorporated into customer’s automation network to enhance system reliability and uptime. In the example below, when the 3-pin terminal block fails to work, the hardware failover function will be activated automatically to keep powering the WGS managed series via the DC plug power alternatively without any loss of operation.
11
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Environment-friendly, Smart Fan Design for Silent Operation
The WGS managed series features a desktop-sized metal housing, a low noise design and an effective ventilation system. It supports the smart fan technology to automatically control the speed of the built-in fan to reduce noise and maintain the temperature of the PoE switch for optimal power output capability. The WGS managed series is able to operate reliably, stably and quietly in any environment without affecting its performance.
IPv6/IPv4 Dual Stack
Supporting both IPv6 and IPv4 protocols, the WGS managed series helps the SMBs to step in the IPv6 era with the lowest investment as its network facilities need not to be replaced or overhauled if the IPv6 FTTx edge network is set up.
Robust Layer 2 Features
The WGS managed series can be programmed for advanced switch management functions such as dynamic port link aggregation, 802.1Q VLAN and Q-in-Q VLAN, Multiple Spanning Tree protocol (MSTP), Loop and BPDU Guard, IGMP
Snooping, and MLD Snooping. Via the link aggregation, the WGS managed series allows the operation of a high-speed trunk to combine with multiple ports such as a 16Gbps fat pipe, and supports fail-over as well. Also, the Link Layer Discovery Protocol
(LLDP) is the Layer 2 protocol included to help discover basic information about neighboring devices on the local broadcast domain.
Efficient Traffic Control
The WGS managed series is loaded with robust QoS features and powerful traffic management to enhance services to business-class data, voice, and video solutions. The functionality includes broadcast / multicast storm control, per port
bandwidth control, IP DSCP QoS priority and remarking. It guarantees the best performance for VoIP and video stream transmission, and empowers the enterprises to take full advantage of the limited network resources.
Powerful Security
PLANET WGS managed series offers comprehensive IPv4 / IPv6 Layer 2 to Layer 4 Access Control List (ACL) for enforcing security to the edge. It can be used to restrict network access by denying packets based on source and destination IP address,
TCP/UDP ports or defined typical network applications. Its protection mechanism also comprises 802.1X port-based user and device authentication, which can be deployed with RADIUS to ensure the port level security and block illegal users. With the
Protected Port function, communication between edge ports can be prevented to guarantee user privacy. Furthermore, Port
Security function allows to limit the number of network devices on a given port.
Advanced Network Security
The WGS managed series also provides DHCP Snooping, IP Source Guard and Dynamic ARP Inspection functions to prevent IP snooping from attack and discard ARP packets with invalid MAC address. The network administrators can now construct highly secured corporate networks with considerably less time and effort than before.
12
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Friendly and Secure Management
For efficient management, the WGS managed series is equipped with Web, Telnet and SNMP management interfaces. With the built-in Web-based management interface, the WGS managed series offers an easy-to-use, platform-independent management and configuration facility. By supporting the standard Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), the switch can be managed via any standard management software. For text-based management, the switch can be accessed via Telnet.
Moreover, the WGS managed series offers secure remote management by supporting SSH, SSL and SNMPv3 connections which encrypt the packet content at each session.
Perfect Managed PoE+ Switch
PLANET WGS PoE managed series is the new generation of PLANET Managed Gigabit PoE+ Switch featuring PLANET
intelligent PoE functions to improve the availability of critical business applications. It provides a quick, safe and cost-effective
Power over Ethernet network solution to IP security surveillance for small businesses and enterprises.
Built-in Unique PoE Functions for Powered Devices Management
As a managed PoE Switch for surveillance, wireless and VoIP networks, the WGS PoE managed series features special PoE
Management functions:
PD Alive Check
Scheduled Power Recycling
PoE Schedule
PoE Usage Monitoring
Intelligent Powered Device Alive Check
The WGS PoE managed series can be configured to monitor connected PD (Powered Device) status in real time via ping action.
Once the PD stops working and responding, the WGS PoE managed series will resume the PoE port power and bring the PD back to work. It will greatly enhance the network reliability through the PoE port resetting the PD’s power source and reducing administrator management burden.
Scheduled Power Recycling
The WGS PoE managed series allows each of the connected PoE IP cameras or PoE wireless access points to reboot at a specific time each week. Therefore, it will reduce the chance of IP camera or AP crash resulting from buffer overflow.
13
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
PoE Schedule for Energy Saving
Under the trend of energy saving worldwide and contributing to environmental protection, the WGS PoE managed series can effectively control the power supply besides its capability of giving high watts power. The “PoE schedule” function helps you to enable or disable PoE power feeding for each PoE port during specified time intervals and it is a powerful function to help SMBs or enterprises save power and money. It also increases security by powering off PDs that should not be in use during non-business hours.
PoE Usage Monitoring
Via the power usage chart in the web management interface, the WGS PoE managed series enables the administrator to monitor the status of the power usage of the connected PDs in real time. Thus, it greatly enhances the management efficiency of the facilities.
Flexibility and Extension Solution
The WGS-4215-8T2S provides two dual-speed fiber SFP slots, it can also connect with the 100BASE-FX / 1000Base-SX/LX
SFP (Small Form-factor Pluggable) fiber transceiver and then to backbone switch and monitoring center over a long distance.
The distance can be extended from 550 meters to 2 kilometers (multi-mode fiber) and up to 10/20/30/40/50/70/120 kilometers
(single-mode fiber or WDM fiber). They are well suited for applications within the enterprise data centers and distributions.
Intelligent SFP Diagnosis Mechanism
The WGS-4215-8T2S supports SFP-DDM (Digital Diagnostic Monitor) function that greatly helps network administrator to easily monitor real-time parameters of the SFP, such as optical output power, optical input power, temperature, laser bias current and transceiver supply voltage.
14
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
1.3 How to Use This Manual
This User Manual is structured as follows:
Section 2
, INSTALLATION
The section explains the functions of the Switch and how to physically install the Managed Switch.
Section 3
, SWITCH MANAGEMENT
The section contains the information about the software function of the Managed Switch.
Section 4
, WEB CONFIGURATION
The section explains how to manage the Managed Switch by Web interface.
Section 5,
SWITCH OPERATION
The chapter explains how to do the switch operation of the Managed Switch.
Section 6
, TROUBLESHOOTING
The chapter explains how to troubleshoot the Managed Switch.
Appendix A
The section contains cable information of the Managed Switch.
15
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
1.4 Product Features
Physical Port
■
10/100/1000BASE-T Gigabit RJ45 copper
■
100/1000BASE-X mini-GBIC/SFP slots (WGS-4215-8T2S only)
Power over Ethernet (WGS PoE managed series)
■
Complies with IEEE 802.3at High Power over Ethernet End-span PSE
■
Complies with IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet End-span PSE
■
IEEE 802.3af/802.3at devices powered
■
Supports PoE Power up to 36 watts for each PoE port
■
Auto detects powered device (PD)
■
Circuit protection prevents power interference between ports
■
Remote power feeding up to 100 meters
■
PoE Management
Total PoE power budget control
Per port PoE function enable/disable
PoE Port Power feeding priority
Per PoE port power limitation
PD classification detection
PD alive check
PoE schedule
Layer 2 Features
■
Prevents packet loss with back pressure (half-duplex) and IEEE 802.3x pause frame flow control (full-duplex)
■
High performance Store and Forward architecture, broadcast storm control, runt/CRC filtering eliminates erroneous packets to optimize the network bandwidth
■
Supports VLAN
- IEEE 802.1Q tagged VLAN
- Provider Bridging (VLAN Q-in-Q) support (IEEE 802.1ad)
- GVRP
■
Supports Spanning Tree Protocol
- STP (Spanning Tree Protocol)
- RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol)
- MSTP (Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol)
- STP BPDU Guard, BPDU Filtering and BPDU Forwarding
■
Supports Link Aggregation
IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)
Cisco ether-channel (static trunk)
■
Provides port mirror (many-to-1)
■
Loop protection to avoid broadcast loops
16
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Quality of Service
■
Ingress/Egress Rate Limit per port bandwidth control
■
Storm Control support
Broadcast/Unknown unicast/Unknown multicast
■
Traffic classification
- IEEE 802.1p CoS
- TOS/DSCP/IP Precedence of IPv4/IPv6 packets
■
Strict priority and Weighted Round Robin (WRR) CoS policies
Multicast
■
Supports IGMP Snooping v2 and v3
■
Supports MLD Snooping v1, v2
■
IGMP Querier mode support
■
IGMP Snooping port filtering
■
MLD Snooping port filtering
Security
■
Authentication
IEEE 802.1X Port-based network access authentication
Built-in RADIUS client to co-operate with the RADIUS servers
RADIUS/TACACS+ login user access authentication
■
Access Control List
IPv4/IPv6 IP-based ACL
MAC-based ACL
■
MAC Security
Static MAC
MAC Filtering
■
Port Security for Source MAC address entries filtering
■
DHCP Snooping to filter distrusted DHCP messages
■
Dynamic ARP Inspection discards ARP packets with invalid MAC address to IP address binding
■
IP Source Guard prevents IP spoofing attacks
■
DoS Attack Prevention
■
SSH/SSL
Management
■
IPv4 and IPv6 dual stack management
■
Switch Management Interface
- Web switch management
- Telnet Command Line Interface
- SNMP v1, v2c and v3
- SSH/SSL secure access
■
User Privilege Levels Control
■
Built-in Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) client
17
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
■
BOOTP and DHCP for IP address assignment
■
System Maintenance
- Firmware upload/download via HTTP/TFTP
- Configuration upload/download through Web interface
- Hardware reset button for system reboot or reset to factory default
■
SNTP Network Time Protocol
■
Cable Diagnostics
■
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) Protocol and LLDP-MED
■
SNMP trap for interface Link Up and Link Down notification
■
Event message logging to remote Syslog server
■
Four RMON groups (history, statistics, alarms, and events)
■
PLANET Smart Discovery Utility
■
Smart fan with speed control
18
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
1.5 Product Specifications
WGS-804HPT
Product
Hardware Specifications
Copper Ports
PoE Inject Port
MAC Address Table
Shared Data Buffer
Flow Control
WGS-804HPT
8-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T RJ45 auto-MDI/MDI-X ports
4-Port with 802.3af / 802.3at PoE injector function (Port-1 to Port-4)
Switch Architecture
Switch Fabric
Store-and-Forward
16Gbps/non-blocking
Switch Throughput@64 bytes
11.9Mpps @64 bytes
8K entries
4.1 megabits
IEEE 802.3x pause frame for full-duplex
Back pressure for half-duplex
Jumbo Frame
Reset Button
LED
Connector
10 Kbytes
< 5 sec: System reboot
> 5 sec: Factory default
Power LED: Power ( Green )
PoE Power Usage LED: 30W, 60W, 90W, 120W ( Green )
PoE Port(Port-1 to Port-4): PoE-in-Use ( Orange )
LNK/ACT ( Green )
10/100/1000BASE-TX Port (Port-5 to Port-8): 1000 ( Green )
LNK/ACT ( Green )
Removable 3-pin terminal block for power input
- Pin 1/2 for Power (Pin 1: V+ / Pin 2: V-)
- Pin 3 for earth ground
DC power jack with 2.0mm central pole
48~56V DC, 3A (max.)
Power Requirements
Power Consumption/
Dissipation
Dimensions (W x D x H)
Weight
ESD Protection
Enclosure
Installation
Power over Ethernet
PoE Standard
PoE Power Supply Type
PoE Power Output
Max. 152 watts/519 BTU
148 x 25 x 134 mm
532g
6KV DC
Metal
Wall mount, magnetic wall mount and DIN-rail kit
IEEE 802.3af / 802.3at Power over Ethernet PSE
End-span
IEEE 802.3af Standard
- Per port 48V~56V DC (depending on the power supply), max. 15.4 watts
IEEE 802.3at Standard
19
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Power Pin Assignment
PoE Power Budget
Max. Number of Class 2 PDs
Max. Number of Class 3 PDs
Max. Number of Class 4 PDs
Layer 2 Functions
Port Mirroring
VLAN
Link Aggregation
Spanning Tree Protocol
IGMP Snooping
MLD Snooping
Access Control List
- Per port 50V~56V DC (depending on the power supply), max. 36 watts
1/2(+), 3/6(-)
144 watts (depending on power input)
4
4
4
TX/RX/Both
Many-to-1 monitor
802.1Q tagged-based VLAN
Up to 256 VLAN groups, out of 4094 VLAN IDs
802.1ad Q-in-Q tunneling (VLAN stacking)
Voice VLAN
Protocol VLAN
Private VLAN (Protected port)
GVRP
Management VLAN
IEEE 802.3ad LACP and static trunk
Supports 4 groups with 4 ports per trunk
STP, IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol
RSTP, IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
MSTP, IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
STP BPDU Guard, BPDU Filtering and BPDU Forwarding
IPv4 IGMP (v2/v3) snooping
IGMP querier
Up to 256 multicast groups
IPv6 MLD (v1/v2) snooping, up to 256 multicast groups
IPv4/IPv6 IP-based ACL/MAC-based ACL
IPv4/IPv6 IP-based ACE/MAC-based ACE
8 mapping ID to 8 level priority queues
QoS
Security
- DSCP/IP precedence of IPv4/IPv6 packets
Traffic classification based, strict priority and WRR
Ingress/Egress Rate Limit per port bandwidth control
IEEE 802.1X port-based authentication
Built-in RADIUS client to co-operate with RADIUS server
RADIUS/TACACS+ authentication
IP-MAC port binding
MAC filtering
Static MAC address
DHCP snooping and DHCP Option82
STP BPDU guard, BPDU filtering and BPDU forwarding
20
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
DoS attack prevention
ARP inspection
IP source guard
Storm control support
Management Functions
Basic Management Interfaces
Web browser/Telnet/SNMP v1, v2c, v3
Firmware upgrade by HTTP/TFTP protocol through Ethernet network
Configuration upload/download through HTTP/TFTP
Remote/Local Syslog
System log
LLDP protocol
SNTP
PLANET Smart Discovery Utility
Secure Management Interfaces
SSH, SSL, SNMP v3
SNMP MIBs
RFC 1213 MIB-II
RFC 1215 Generic Traps
RFC 1493 Bridge MIB
RFC 2674 Bridge MIB Extensions
RFC 2737 Entity MIB (version 2)
RFC 2819 RMON (1, 2, 3, 9)
RFC 2863 Interface Group MIB
RFC 3635 Ethernet-like MIB
Standards Conformance
Regulatory Compliance
Stability Testing
Standards Compliance
FCC Part 15 Class A, CE
IEC 60068-2-32 (free fall)
IEC 60068-2-27 (shock)
IEC 60068-2-6 (vibration)
IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T
IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX/100BASE-FX
IEEE 802.3z Gigabit SX/LX
IEEE 802.3ab Gigabit 1000BASE-T
IEEE 802.3x Flow Control and Back Pressure
IEEE 802.3ad Port Trunk with LACP
IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol
IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
IEEE 802.1p Class of Service
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Tagging
IEEE 802.1x Port Authentication Network Control
IEEE 802.1ab LLDP
RFC 768 UDP
RFC 793 TFTP
RFC 791 IP
RFC 792 ICMP
RFC 2068 HTTP
RFC 1112 IGMP v1
RFC 2236 IGMP v2
21
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
RFC 3376 IGMP v3
RFC 2710 MLD v1
RFC 3810 MLD v2
Environment
Operating
Storage
WGS-4215-8T / WGS-4215-8T2S
Temperature:
Relative Humidity:
Temperature:
Relative Humidity:
-40 ~ 75 degrees C
5 ~ 95% (non-condensing)
-40 ~ 75 degrees C
5 ~ 95% (non-condensing)
Product
Hardware Specifications
Copper Ports
WGS-4215-8T WGS-4215-8T2S
SFP/mini-GBIC Slots
8 x 10/100/1000BASE-T RJ45 auto-MDI/MDI-X ports
---
2 x 100/1000BASE-X SFP interfaces
Supports 100/1000Mbps dual mode and DDM
Switch Architecture
Switch Fabric
Flow Control
Jumbo Frame
Store-and-Forward
16Gbps / non-blocking 20Gbps / non-blocking
Switch Throughput@64Bytes
11.9Mpps 14.8Mpps
Address Table
8K entries
Shared Data Buffer
4.1 megabits
IEEE 802.3x pause frame for full-duplex
Back pressure for half-duplex
10K bytes
Reset Button
LED
Dimensions (W x D x H)
Weight
Power Requirements
ESD Protection
< 5 sec: System reboot
> 5 sec: Factory default
WGS-4215-8T:
Power (
Green
)
10/100/1000T RJ45 Interfaces (Port 1 to Port 8):
1000 LNK / ACT (
Green
), 10/100 LNK/ACT (
Orange
)
WGS-4215-8T2S:
Power (
Green
)
10/100/1000T RJ45 Interfaces (Port 1 to Port 8):
1000 LNK / ACT (
Green
), 10/100 LNK/ACT (
Orange
)
100/1000Mbps SFP Interfaces (Port 9 to Port 10):
1000 LNK / ACT (
Green
), 100 LNK/ACT (
Orange
)
148 x 25 x 134 mm 178 x 25 x 134 mm
496g 663kg
12V~48V DC,1A
24V AC,1A
6KV DC
12V~48V DC,1A
24V AC,1A
22
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Power Consumption /
Dissipation
Enclosure
Layer 2 Functions
10 watts (max.) /
34 BTU
Metal
7.9 watts (max.) /
26 BTU
Port Mirroring
VLAN
Link Aggregation
Spanning Tree Protocol
IGMP Snooping
TX / RX / both
Many-to-1 monitor
802.1Q tagged-based VLAN
Up to 256 VLAN groups, out of 4094 VLAN IDs
802.1ad Q-in-Q tunneling
Voice VLAN
Protocol VLAN
Private VLAN (Protected port)
GVRP
IEEE 802.3ad LACP and static trunk
Supports 4 groups of 8-port trunk
STP / RSTP / MSTP
IGMP (v2/v3) Snooping
IGMP Querier
Up to 256 multicast groups
MLD (v1/v2) Snooping, up to 256 multicast groups
MLD Snooping
Access Control List
IPv4/IPv6 IP-based ACL/MAC-based ACL
QoS
Security
8 mapping ID to 8 level priority queues
- Port number
- 802.1p priority
- 802.1Q VLAN tag
- DSCP field in IP packet
Traffic classification based, strict priority and WRR
IEEE 802.1X – Port-based authentication
Built-in RADIUS client to co-operate with RADIUS server
RADIUS / TACACS+ user access authentication
IP-MAC port binding
MAC filter
Static MAC address
DHCP Snooping and DHCP Option82
STP BPDU guard, BPDU filtering and BPDU forwarding
DoS attack prevention
ARP inspection
IP source guard
Management Functions
Basic Management Interfaces
Web browser / Telnet / SNMP v1, v2c
Firmware upgrade by HTTP / TFTP protocol through Ethernet network
Remote / Local Syslog
System log
LLDP protocol
SNTP
23
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Secure Management Interfaces
SSH, SSL, SNMP v3
SNMP MIBs
RFC 1213 MIB-II
RFC 1215 Generic Traps
RFC 1493 Bridge MIB
RFC 2674 Bridge MIB Extensions
RFC 2737 Entity MIB (Version 2)
RFC 2819 RMON (1, 2, 3, 9)
RFC 2863 Interface Group MIB
RFC 3635 Ethernet-like MIB
Standards Conformance
Regulation Compliance
Standards Compliance
FCC Part 15 Class A, CE
IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T
IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX/100BASE-FX
IEEE 802.3z Gigabit SX/LX
IEEE 802.3ab Gigabit 1000T
IEEE 802.3x flow control and back pressure
IEEE 802.3ad port trunk with LACP
IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol
IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
IEEE 802.1p Class of Service
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagging
IEEE 802.1x Port Authentication Network Control
IEEE 802.1ab LLDP
IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet
IEEE 802.3at High Power over Ethernet
RFC 768 UDP
RFC 793 TFTP
RFC 791 IP
RFC 792 ICMP
RFC 2068 HTTP
RFC 1112 IGMP v1
RFC 2236 IGMP v2
RFC 3376 IGMP v3
RFC 2710 MLD v1
RFC 3810 MLD v2
Environment
Operating
Storage
Temperature: 0 ~ 50 degrees C
Relative Humidity: 5 ~ 95% (non-condensing)
Temperature: -20 ~ 70 degrees C
Relative Humidity: 5 ~ 95% (non-condensing)
24
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
2. INSTALLATION
This section describes the hardware features and installation of the Managed Switch on the desktop or rack mount. For easier management and control of the Managed Switch, familiarize yourself with its display indicators and ports. Front panel illustrations in this chapter display the unit LED indicators. Before connecting any network device to the Managed Switch, please read this chapter completely.
2.1 Hardware Description
2.1.1 Switch Front Panel
The front panel provides a simple interface monitoring of the Managed Switch. Figure 2-1-1a~ Figure 2-1-1c show the front panel of the Managed Switch.
WGS-804HPT Front Panel
Figure 2-1-1a WGS-804HPT Front Panel
25
WGS-4215-8T Front Panel
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
WGS-4215-8T2S Front Panel
Figure 2-1-1b WGS-4215-8T Front Panel
Figure 2-1-1c WGS-4215-8T2S Front Panel
26
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
■
Gigabit TP Interface
10/100/1000BASE-T Copper, RJ45 Twisted-pair: Up to 100 meters.
■
100/1000BASE-X SFP Slots (WGS-4215-8T2S only)
Each of the SFP (Small Form-factor Pluggable) slots supports dual-speed, 1000BASE-SX / LX or 100BASE-FX
- For 1000BASE-SX/LX SFP transceiver module: From 550 meters (multi-mode fiber) to 10/30/50/70/120 kilometers
(single-mode fiber).
- For 100BASE-FX SFP transceiver module: From 2 kilometers (multi-mode fiber) to 20/40/60 kilometers (single-mode fiber).
■
AC/DC Power Receptacle
The Managed Switch features a strong dual power input system (Terminal block and DC jack) incorporated into customer’s automation network to enhance system reliability and uptime.
Power Input
Range
Model
WGS-804HPT
3-pin Terminal Block
WGS-4215-8T
WGS-4215-8T2S
48~56V DC
12~48V DC,
24V AC
12~48V DC,
24V AC
DC Jack
48~56V DC
12~48V DC,
24V AC
12~48V DC
To install the 3-pin Terminal Block Connector on the Wall-mount Managed Switch, follow the following steps:
Step 1: Insert positive DC power wire into V+, negative DC power wire into V-, and grounding wire into Ground.
Step 2: Tighten the wire-clamp screws for preventing the wires from loosening.
Power Notice:
In some areas, installing a surge suppression device may also help to protect your Managed Switch from being damaged by unregulated surge or current to the Managed Switch.
■
Reset Button
On the left of the front panel, the reset button is designed to reboot the Managed Switch without turning off and on the power. The following is the summary table of Reset button functions:
27
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Reset Button Pressed and Released Function
< 5 sec: System Reboot Reboot the Managed Switch.
> 5 sec: Factory Default
Reset the Managed Switch to Factory Default configuration.
The Managed Switch will then reboot and load the default settings shown below:
。
。
。
。
。
Default username: admin
Default password: admin
Default IP address: 192.168.0.100
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Default gateway: 192.168.0.254
2.1.2 LED Indications
The front panel LEDs indicate instant status of port links, data activity and system power; it helps monitor and troubleshoot when needed. Figure 2-1-2a~2-1-2c show the LED indications of these Managed Switches.
WGS-804HPT LED Indication
Figure 2-1-2a WGS-804HPT LED Panel
28
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
■
System
LED Color Function
PWR Green
Lights to indicate that the Switch has power.
■
PoE 10/100/1000BASE-T Interfaces (Port-1 to Port-4)
LED Color Function
LNK/ACT
PoE
Green
Lights: To indicate the link through that port is successfully established.
Blinks: To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.
Orange
Lights: To indicate the port is providing DC in-line power.
Off:
To indicate the connected device is not a PoE Powered Device (PD)
■
10/100/1000BASE-T Interfaces (Port-5 to Port-8)
LED Color Function
LNK/ACT Green
Lights: To indicate the link through that port is successfully established.
Blinks: To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.
1000
Lights: To indicate that the port is operating at 1000Mbps.
Green
Off:
If LNK/ACT LED is Off, it indicates that the port is link-down or operating at
10/100Mbps
■
PoE Power Usage (Unit: Watt)
LED
30
60
90
120
Color Function
Green
Lights: To indicate the system consumes over 30-watt PoE power budget
Green
Lights: To indicate the system consumes over 60-watt PoE power budget
Green
Lights: To indicate the system consumes over 90-watt PoE power budget
Green
Lights: To indicate the system consumes over 120-watt PoE power budget
29
WGS-4215-8T LED Indication
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 2-1-2b WGS-4215-8T LED Panel
■
System
LED Color Function
PWR Green
Lights to indicate that the Switch has power.
■
10/100/1000BASE-T Interfaces (Port-1 to Port-8)
1
LED
0/100
LNK/ACT
1000
LNK/ACT
Color Function
Orange
Lights: To indicate the link through that port is successfully established and operating at
10/100Mbps.
Blinks:
To indicate tha t the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.
Green
Lights: To indicate the link through that port is successfully established and operating at
1000Mbps.
Blinks:
To indicate th at the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.
30
WGS-4215-8T2S LED Indication
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 2-1-2c WGS-4215-8T2S LED Panel
■
System
LED Color
PWR
■
10/100/1000BASE-T Interfaces (Port-1 to Port-4)
Function
Green
Lights to indicate that the Switch has power.
LED
10/100
LNK/ACT
1000
LNK/ACT
Color
Green
Function
Orange
Lights: To indicate the link through that port is successfully established and operating at
100Mbps.
Blinks: To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.
Lights: To indicate the link through that port is successfully established and operating at
1000Mbps.
Blinks: To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.
■
100/1000BASE-X Interfaces (Port-5 to Port-8)
LED Color
100
Function
Orange
Lights: To indicate the link through that port is successfully established and operating at
10/100Mbps.
Blinks: To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.
LNK/ACT
1000
LNK/ACT
Green
Lights: To indicate the link through that port is successfully established and operating at
1000Mbps.
Blinks: To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.
31
2.1.3 Physical Dimensions
WGS-804HPT
Dimensions (W x D x H) : 148 x 25 x 134mm
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
32
WGS-4215-8T
Dimensions (W x D x H) : 148 x 25 x 134mm
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
33
WGS-4215-8T2S
Dimensions (W x D x H) : 178 x 25 x 134mm
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
34
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
2.2 Installing the Switch
This section describes how to install your Managed Switch and make connections to the Managed Switch. Please read the following topics and perform the procedures in the order being presented. To install your Managed Switch on a desktop or shelf, simply complete the following steps.
2.2.1 Wall Mount/Magnet Installation
A. To install the Managed Switch on desktop or shelf, please follow these steps:
Step 1:
There are 4 holes with 8mm diameter on the wall;
■
WGS-804HPT/WGS-4215-8T: the distance between the 2 holes is 133mm
■
WGS-4215-8T2S: the distance between the 2 holes is 163mm
Note: The line through them must be horizontal.
Step 2: Install a conductor pipe inside the board hole and flush the edge of the conductor pipe with the wall surface .
Step 3:
Screw the bolts into the conductor pipe. The Wall-mount Managed Switch is between bolts and conductor pipe, as shown below.
35
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
B. To install the Wall-mount Managed Switch on a magnetic surface, simply follow the following diagram:
2.2.2 DIN-rail Mount Installation
The DIN-rail kit is included in the package. When the wall-mount application for the Wall-mount Managed Switch needs to be replaced with DIN-rail application, please refer to the following figures to screw the DIN-rail on the Wall-mount Managed Switch.
To hang up the Wall-mount Managed Switch, follow the steps below:
Step 1: Screw the DIN-rail on the Wall-mount Managed Switch.
36
Step 2:
Lightly insert the button of DIN-rail into the track.
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Step 3:
Check whether the DIN-rail is tightly on the track.
37
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
2.2.3 Installing the SFP transceiver
The sections describe how to insert an SFP transceiver into an SFP slot. The SFP transceivers are hot-pluggable and hot-swappable. You can plug in and out the transceiver to/from any SFP port without having to power down the Managed Switch, as the Figure 2-1-7 shows.
Figure 2-1-7 Plug in the SFP transceiver
Approved PLANET SFP Transceivers
PLANET Managed Switch supports both single mode and multi-mode SFP transceivers. The following list of approved PLANET
SFP transceivers is correct at the time of publication:
Fast Ethernet Transceiver (100BASE-X SFP)
Model
MFB-FX
MFB-F20
MFB-F40
MFB-F60
MFB-F120
MFB-TFX
MFB-TF20
Speed (Mbps)
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Connector
Interface
LC
LC
LC
LC
LC
LC
LC
Fiber Mode
Multi Mode
Single Mode
Single Mode
Single Mode
Single Mode
Multi Mode
Single Mode
Distance
2km
20km
40km
60km
120km
2km
20km
Wavelength (nm)
Fast Ethernet Transceiver (100BASE-BX, Single Fiber Bi-directional SFP)
Model
Speed (Mbps) Connector
MFB-FA20
MFB-FB20
MFB-TFA20
MFB-TFB20
MFB-TFA40
MFB-TFB40
100
100
100
100
100
100
Fiber Mode Distance
WDM(LC) Single Mode 20km
WDM(LC) Single Mode
WDM(LC) Single Mode
WDM(LC) Single Mode
WDM(LC) Single Mode
WDM(LC) Single Mode
20km
20km
20km
40km
40km
Wavelength
(TX)
1310nm
1550nm
1310nm
1550nm
1310nm
1550nm
1310nm
1310nm
1310nm
1310nm
1550nm
1310nm
1550nm
Wavelength
(RX)
1550nm
1310nm
1550nm
1310nm
1550nm
1310nm
Operating Temp.
0 ~ 60 degrees C
0 ~ 60 degrees C
0 ~ 60 degrees C
0 ~ 60 degrees C
0 ~ 60 degrees C
-40 ~ 75 degrees C
-40 ~ 75 degrees C
Operating Temp.
0 ~ 60 degrees C
0 ~ 60 degrees C
-40 ~ 75 degrees C
-40 ~ 75 degrees C
-40 ~ 75 degrees C
-40 ~ 75 degrees C
38
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Gigabit Ethernet Transceiver (1000BASE-X SFP)
Model
MGB-GT
MGB-SX
MGB-SX2
MGB-LX
MGB-L30
MGB-L50
MGB-L70
MGB-L120
MGB-TSX
MGB-TLX
MGB-TL30
MGB-TL70
Speed (Mbps)
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
Connector
Interface
Copper
LC
LC
LC
LC
LC
LC
LC
LC
LC
LC
LC
Fiber Mode
--
Multi Mode
Multi Mode
Single Mode
Single Mode
Single Mode
Single Mode
Single Mode
Multi Mode
Single Mode
Single Mode
Single Mode
Gigabit Ethernet Transceiver (1000BASE-BX, Single Fiber Bi-directional SFP)
Distance Wavelength (nm) Operating Temp.
100m
550m
2km
10km
30km
50km
70km
120km
550m
10km
30km
70km
--
850nm
1310nm
1310nm
1310nm
1550nm
1550nm
1550nm
850nm
1310nm
1310nm
1550nm
0 ~ 60 degrees C
0 ~ 60 degrees C
0 ~ 60 degrees C
0 ~ 60 degrees C
0 ~ 60 degrees C
0 ~ 60 degrees C
0 ~ 60 degrees C
0 ~ 60 degrees C
-40 ~ 75 degrees C
-40 ~ 75 degrees C
-40 ~ 75 degrees C
-40 ~ 75 degrees C
Model
Speed (Mbps)
MGB-LA10
MGB-LB10
MGB-LA20
MGB-LB20
MGB-LA40
MGB-LB40
MGB-LA60
MGB-LB60
MGB-TLA10
MGB-TLB10
MGB-TLA20
MGB-TLB20
MGB-TLA40
MGB-TLB40
MGB-TLA60
MGB-TLB60
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
Connector
Interface
Fiber Mode Distance
Wavelength Wavelength
(TX) (RX)
Operating Temp.
WDM(LC) Single Mode 10km 1310nm 1550nm 0 ~ 60 degrees C
WDM(LC) Single Mode
WDM(LC) Single Mode
WDM(LC) Single Mode
WDM(LC) Single Mode
10km
20km
20km
40km
1550nm
1310nm
1550nm
1310nm
1310nm
1550nm
1310nm
1550nm
0 ~ 60 degrees C
0 ~ 60 degrees C
0 ~ 60 degrees C
0 ~ 60 degrees C
WDM(LC) Single Mode
WDM(LC) Single Mode
WDM(LC) Single Mode
WDM(LC) Single Mode
40km
60km
60km
10km
1550nm
1310nm
1550nm
1310nm
1310nm
1550nm
1310nm
0 ~ 60 degrees C
0 ~ 60 degrees C
0 ~ 60 degrees C
1550nm -40 ~ 75 degrees C
WDM(LC) Single Mode
WDM(LC) Single Mode
WDM(LC) Single Mode
WDM(LC) Single Mode
WDM(LC) Single Mode
WDM(LC) Single Mode
WDM(LC) Single Mode
10km
20km
20km
40km
40km
60km
60km
1550nm
1310nm
1550nm
1310nm
1550nm
1310nm
1550nm
1310nm -40 ~ 75 degrees C
1550nm -40 ~ 75 degrees C
1310nm -40 ~ 75 degrees C
1550nm -40 ~ 75 degrees C
1310nm -40 ~ 75 degrees C
1550nm -40 ~ 75 degrees C
1310nm -40 ~ 75 degrees C
It is recommended to use PLANET SFP on the Managed Switch. If you insert an SFP transceiver that is not supported, the Managed Switch will not recognize it.
In the installation steps below, this Manual uses Gigabit SFP transceiver as an example. However, the steps for Fast Ethernet SFP transceiver are similar.
39
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
1. Before we connect Managed Switch to the other network device, we have to make sure both sides of the SFP transceivers are with the same media type, for example, 1000BASE-SX to 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX to
1000BASE-LX.
2. Check whether the fiber-optic cable type matches with the SFP transceiver requirement.
To connect to 1000BASE-SX SFP transceiver, please use the multi-mode fiber cable with one side being the male duplex LC connector type.
To connect to 1000BASE-LX SFP transceiver, please use the single-mode fiber cable with one side being the male duplex LC connector type.
Connect the Fiber Cable
1. Insert the duplex LC connector into the SFP transceiver.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to a device with SFP transceiver installed.
3. Check the LNK/ACT LED of the SFP slot on the front of the Managed Switch. Ensure that the SFP transceiver is operating correctly.
4. Check the Link mode of the SFP port if the link fails. To function with some fiber-NICs or media converters, user has to set the port Link mode to “1000 Force” or “100 Force”.
Remove the Transceiver Module
1. Make sure there is no network activity anymore.
2. Remove the fiber-optic cable gently.
3. Lift up the lever of the MGB module and turn it to a horizontal position.
4. Pull out the module gently through the lever.
Figure 2-1-8 How to Pull Out the SFP Transceiver
Never pull out the module without lifting up the lever of the module and turning it into a horizontal position. Directly pulling out the module could damage the module and the SFP module slot of the
Managed Switch.
40
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
3. SWITCH MANAGEMENT
This chapter explains the methods that you can use to configure management access to the Managed Switch. It describes the types of management applications and the communication and management protocols that deliver data between your management device (workstation or personal computer) and the system. It also contains information about port connection options.
This chapter covers the following topics:
Requirements
Management Overview
Web Access
SNMP
Standards, Protocols, and Related Reading
3.1 Requirements
Workstations running Windows 2000/XP, 2003, Vista/7/8, 2008, MAC OS9 or later, Linux, UNIX or other platforms are compatible with TCP/IP protocols.
Workstation is installed with Ethernet NIC (Network Interface Card).
Ethernet Port connection
Network cables -- Use standard network (UTP) cables with RJ45 connectors.
The above Workstation is installed with Web browser and Java runtime environment plug-in.
It is recommended to use Internet Explore 8.0 or above to access Managed Switch.
41
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
3.2 Management Access Overview
The Managed Switch gives you the flexibility to access and manage it using any or all of the following methods:
Web browser interface
An
The Web browser interfaces are embedded in the Managed Switch software and are available for immediate use. Each of these management methods has their own advantages. Table 3-1 compares the three management methods.
Method
Web Browser
Ideal for configuring the switch remotely
Compatible with all popular browsers
Can be accessed from any location
Most visually appealing
SNMP Agent
Advantages
Communicates with switch functions at the MIB level
Based on open standards
Disadvantages
Security can be compromised (hackers need to only know the IP address and subnet mask)
May encounter lag times on poor connections
Requires SNMP manager software
Least visually appealing of all three methods
Some settings require calculations
Security can be compromised (hackers need to only know the community name)
Table 3-1 Comparison of Management Methods
42
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
3.
3 Web Management
The Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer. After you set up your IP address for the switch, you can access the Managed Switch's Web interface applications directly in your Web browser by entering the IP address of the
Managed Switch.
Figure 3-1-3 Web Management
You can then use your Web browser to list and manage the Managed Switch configuration parameters from one central location.
Web Management requires either Microsoft Internet Explorer 8.0 or later, Google Chrome, Safari or Mozilla Firefox 1.5 or later.
Figure 3-1-4 Web Main Screen of Managed Switch
43
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
3.
4 SNMP-based Network Management
You can use an external SNMP-based application to configure and manage the Managed Switch, such as SNMPc Network
Manager, HP Openview Network Node Management (NNM) or What’s Up Gold. This management method requires the SNMP agent on the switch and the SNMP Network Management Station to use the same community string. This management method, in fact, uses two community strings: the get community string and the set community string. If the SNMP Network management Station only knows the set community string, it can read and write to the MIBs. However, if it only knows the get community string, it can only read MIBs. The default gets and sets community strings for the Managed Switch are public.
Figure 3-1-5 SNMP Management
3.6 PLANET Smart Discovery Utility
For easily listing the Managed Switch in your Ethernet environment, the Planet Smart Discovery Utility from user’s manual
CD-ROM is an ideal solution. The following installation instructions are to guide you to running the Planet Smart Discovery
Utility.
1. Deposit the Planet Smart Discovery Utility in administrator PC.
2. Run this utility as the following screen appears.
Figure 3-1-6: Planet Smart Discovery Utility Screen
44
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
If there are two LAN cards or above in the same administrator PC, choose a different LAN card by using the “Select Adapter” tool.
Figure 3-1-7: Planet Smart Discovery Utility Screen
1. This utility shows all the necessary information from the devices, such as MAC Address, Device Name, firmware version and Device IP Subnet address. It can also assign new password, IP Subnet address and description to the devices.
2. After setup is completed, press the “Update Device”, “Update Multi” or “Update All” button to take effect. The meaning of the 3 buttons above are shown below:
Update Device: use current setting on one single device.
Update Multi: use current setting on multi-devices.
Update All: use current setting on whole devices in the list.
The same functions mentioned above also can be found in “Option” tools bar.
3. To click the “Control Packet Force Broadcast” function, it allows you to assign a new setting value to the Web Smart
Switch under a different IP subnet address. the Figure 3-1-4.
5. Press the “Exit” button to shut down the Planet Smart Discovery Utility.
45
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4. WEB CONFIGURATION
This section introduces the configuration and functions of the Web-based management.
About Web-based Management
The Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer.
The Web-based Management supports Internet Explorer 8.0. It is based on Java Applets with an aim to reduce network bandwidth consumption, enhance access speed and present an easy viewing screen.
By default, IE8.0 or later version does not allow Java Applets to open sockets. The user has to explicitly modify the browser setting to enable Java Applets to use network ports.
The Managed Switch can be configured through an Ethernet connection, making sure the manager PC must be set on the same
IP subnet address as the Managed Switch.
For example, the default IP address of the Managed Switch is 192.168.0.100, then the manager PC should be set at
192.168.0.x (where x is a number between 1 and 254, except 100), and the default subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
If you have changed the default IP address of the Managed Switch to 192.168.1.1 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0 via WebUI, then the manager PC should be set at 192.168.1.x (where x is a number between 2 and 254) to do the relative configuration on manager PC.
Figure 4-1-1 Web Management
Logging on the switch
1. Use Internet Explorer 8.0 or above Web browser. Enter the factory-default IP address to access the Web interface. The factory-default IP address is as follows:
http://192.168.0.100
46
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
2. When the following login screen appears, please enter the default username "admin" with password “admin” to login the main screen of Managed Switch. The login screen in Figure 4-1-2 appears.
Figure 4-1-2 Login screen
Default User Name: admin
Default Password: admin
After entering the username and password, the main screen appears as Figure 4-1-3 .
Figure 4-1-3 Default Main Page
47
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Now, you can use the Web management interface to continue the switch management or manage the Managed Switch by Web interface. The Switch Menu on the left of the web page lets you access all the commands and statistics the Managed Switch provides.
It is recommended to use Internet Explore 8.0 or above to access Managed Switch.
The changed IP address takes effect immediately after clicking on the Save button. You need to use the new IP address to access the Web interface.
For security reason, please change and memorize the new password after this first setup.
Only accept command in lowercase letter under Web interface.
48
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.1 Main Web Page
The Managed Switch provides a Web-based browser interface for configuring and managing it. This interface allows you to access the Managed Switch using the Web browser of your choice. This chapter describes how to use the Managed Switch’s
Web browser interface to configure and manage it.
Main Functions Menu
Main Screen
Copper Port Link Status
SFP Port Link Status
Figure 4-1-4 Main Page
Panel Display
The Web agent displays an image of the Managed Switch’s ports. The Mode can be set to display different information for the ports, including Link up or Link down. Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port Statistics page.
The port states are illustrated as follows:
State
RJ45 Ports
SFP Ports
Main Menu
Using the onboard Web agent, you can define system parameters, manage and control the Managed Switch, and all its ports, or monitor network conditions. Via the Web-Management, the administrator can set up the Managed Switch by selecting the functions those listed in the Main Function. The screen in Figure 4-1-5 appears.
49
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-1-5 Managed Switch Main Functions Menu
Buttons
: Click to save changes or reset to default.
: Click to logout the Managed Switch.
: Click to reboot the Managed Switch.
: Click to refresh the page.
4.1.1 Save Button
This save button allows you to save the running / startup / backup configuration or reset switch in default parameter. The screen in Figure 4-1-6 appears.
Figure 4-1-6 Save Button Screenshot
50
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Save Configuration to
FLASH
Restore to Default
Description
Click to save the configuration. For more detailed information, please refer to chapter 4.1.2
Click to reset switch in default parameter. For more detailed information, please refer to chapter 4.15.1
4.1.2 Configuration Manager
The system file folder contains configuration settings. The screen in Figure 4-1-7 appears.
Figure 4-1-7 Save Button Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Running Configuration
Refers to the running configuration sequence use in the switch.
In switch, the running configuration file stores in the RAM. In the current version, the running configuration sequence running-config can be saved from the RAM to FLASH by saving “Source File = Running Configuration” to “Destination
File = Startup Configuration”, so that the running configuration sequence becomes the startup configuration file, which is called configuration save.
To prevent illicit file upload and easier configuration, switch mandates the name of running configuration file to be running-config.
Startup Configuration
Refers to the configuration sequence used in switch startup.
Startup configuration file stores in nonvolatile storage, corresponding to the so-called configuration save. If the device supports multi-config file, name the configuration file to be .cfg file, the default is startup.cfg.
If the device does not support multi-config file, mandates the name of startup
51
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
configuration file to be startup-config.
Buttons
Backup Configuration
The backup configuration is empty in FLASH; please save the backup configuration first by “Maintenance > Backup Manager”.
: Click to save configuration.
4.1.2.1 Saving Configuration
In the Managed Switch, the running configuration file stores in the RAM. In the current version, the running configuration sequence of running-config can be saved from the RAM to FLASH by ”Save Configurations to FLASH” function, so that the running configuration sequence becomes the startup configuration file, which is called configuration save.
To save all applied changes and set the current configuration as a startup configuration. The startup-configuration file will be loaded automatically across a system reboot.
2. Select “Source File = Running Configuration” and “Destination File = Startup Configuration”.
3. Press the “Apply” button to save running configuration to startup configuration.
52
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.2 System
Use the System menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the Managed Switch. Under System the following topics are provided to configure and view the system information. This section has the following items:
■
System Information
■
IP Configurations
■
IPv6 Configuration
■
User Configuration
■
Time Settings
■
Log Management
■
SNMP Management
4.2.1 System Information
The switch system information is provided here.
Configure the switch-managed IP information on this page.
Configure the switch-managed IPv6 information on this page.
Configure new user name and password on this page.
Configure SNTP on this page.
The switch log information is provided here.
Configure SNMP on this page.
The System Info page provides information for the current device information. System Info page helps a switch administrator to identify the hardware MAC address, software version and system uptime. The screens in Figure 4-2-1 & Figure 4-2-2 appear.
Figure 4-2-1 System Information Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
System Name
Description
Display the current system name
53
Buttons
System Location
System Contact
MAC Address
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
Loader Version
Loader Date
Firmware Version
Firmware Date
System Object ID
System Up Time
PCN/HW Version
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Display the current system location
Display the current system contact
The MAC address of this Managed Switch.
The IP address of this Managed Switch.
The subnet mask of this Managed Switch.
The gateway of this Managed Switch.
The loader version of this Managed Switch.
The loader date of this Managed Switch.
The firmware version of this Managed Switch.
The firmware date of this Managed Switch.
The system object ID of the Managed Switch.
The period of time the device has been operational.
The hardware version of this Managed Switch.
: Click to edit parameter.
4.2.2 IP Configurations
The IP Configuration includes the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway. The configured column is used to view or change the
IP configuration. Fill out the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway for the device. The screens in Figure 4-2-2 & Figure 4-2-3 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-2-2 IP Address Setting Page Screenshot
54
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Object
Mode
Buttons
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
DNS Server 1/2
: Click to apply changes.
Description
Indicates the IP address mode operation. Possible modes are:
Static: Enable NTP mode operation.
When enabling NTP mode operation, the agent forwards and transfers
NTP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain.
DHCP: Enable DHCP client mode operation.
Enable the DHCP client by checking this box. If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is zero, DHCP will retry. If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is non-zero, DHCP will stop and the configured IP settings will be used. The DHCP client will announce the configured
System Name as hostname to provide DNS lookup.
Provide the IP address of this switch in dotted decimal notation.
Provide the subnet mask of this switch in dotted decimal notation.
Provide the IP address of the router in dotted decimal notation.
Provide the IP address of the DNS Server in dotted decimal notation.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-2-3 IP Information Page Screenshot
55
Description
Display the current DHCP state.
Display the current IP address.
Display the current subnet mask.
Display the current gateway.
Display the current DNS server.
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Object
DHCP State
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
DNS Server 1/2
4.2.3 IPv6 Configuration
The IPv6 Configuration includes Auto Configuration, IPv6 Address and Gateway. The configured column is used to view or change the IPv6 configuration. Fill out the Auto Configuration, IPv6 Address and Gateway for the device. The screens in Figure
4-2-4 & Figure 4-2-5 appear.
Figure 4-2-4 IPv6 Address Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Auto Configuration
IPv6 Address
Description
Enable IPv6 auto-configuration by checking this box.
If it fails, the configured IPv6 address is zero. The router may delay responding to a router solicitation for a few seconds; the total time needed to complete auto-configuration can be significantly longer.
Provide the IPv6 address of this switch.
IPv6 address is in 128-bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field (:). For example,
'fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7'.
The symbol '::' is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16-bit groups of contiguous zeros; but it can only appear once. It also uses the following legally IPv4 address. For example, ':192.1.2.34'.
Provide the IPv6 Prefix of this switch. The allowed range is 1 through 128.
56
Gateway
DHCPv6 Client
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Provide the IPv6 gateway address of this switch.
IPv6 address is in 128-bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field (:). For example,
'fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7'.
To enable this Managed Switch to accept a configuration from a Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol version 6 (DHCPv6) server. By default, the Managed
Switch does not perform DHCPv6 client actions. DHCPv6 clients request the delegation of long-lived prefixes that they can push to individual local hosts.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-2-5 IPv6 Information Page Screenshot
Object
Auto Configuration
IPv6 In Use Address
IPv6 In Use Router
IPv6 Static Address
IPv6 Static Router
DHCPv6 Client
Description
Display the current auto configuration state
Display the current IPv6 in-use address
Display the current in-use gateway
Display the current IPv6 static address
Display the current IPv6 static gateway
Display the current DHCPv6 client status
57
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.2.4 User Configuration
This page provides an overview of the current users and privilege type. Currently the only way to login as another user on the
Web server is to close and reopen the browser. After the setup is completed, please press “Apply” button to take effect. Please login Web interface with a new user name and password; the screens in Figure 4-2-6 & Figure 4-2-7 appear.
Figure 4-2-6 Local User Information Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Username
Password Type
Password
Retype Password
Privilege Type
Description
The name identifying the user.
Maximum length: 32 characters;
Maximum number of users: 8
The password type for the user.
Enter the user’s new password here.
(Range: 0-32 characters plain text, case sensitive)
Please enter the user’s new password here again to confirm.
The privilege type for the user.
Options:
Admin
User
Other
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-2-7 Local User Page Screenshot
58
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Object
Username
Password Type
Privilege Type
Modify
Description
Display the current username
Display the current password type
Display the current privilege type
Click to modify the local user entry
: Delete the current user
4.2.5 Time Settings
4.2.5.1 System Time
Configure SNTP on this page. SNTP is an acronym for Simple Network Time Protocol, a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems. You can specify SNTP Servers and set GMT Time zone. The SNTP Configuration screens in
Figure 4-2-8 & Figure 4-2-9 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-2-8 SNTP Setup Page Screenshot
Object
Enable SNTP
Description
Enabled: Enable SNTP mode operation.
When enabling SNTP mode operation, the agent forwards and transfers
SNTP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain.
Disabled: Disable SNTP mode operation.
59
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Buttons
Manual Time
Time Zone
Daylight Saving Time
Daylight Saving Time
Offset
Recurring From
Recurring To
Non-recurring From
Non-recurring To
To set time manually.
Year - Select the starting Year.
Month - Select the starting month.
Day - Select the starting day.
Hours - Select the starting hour.
Minutes - Select the starting minute.
Seconds - Select the starting seconds.
Allows to select the time zone according to the current location of switch.
This is used to set the clock forward or backward according to the configurations set below for a defined Daylight Saving Time duration. Select 'Disable' to disable the Daylight Saving Time configuration. Select 'Recurring' and configure the
Daylight Saving Time duration to repeat the configuration every year. Select
'Non-Recurring' and configure the Daylight Saving Time duration for single time configuration. (Default: Disabled).
Enter the number of minutes to add during Daylight Saving Time. ( Range: 1 to
1440 )
Week - Select the starting week number.
Day - Select the starting day.
Month - Select the starting month.
Hours - Select the starting hour.
Minutes - Select the starting minute.
Week - Select the starting week number.
Day - Select the starting day.
Month - Select the starting month.
Hours - Select the starting hour.
Minutes - Select the starting minute.
Week - Select the starting week number.
Day - Select the starting day.
Month - Select the starting month.
Hours - Select the starting hour.
Minutes - Select the starting minute.
Week - Select the starting week number.
Day - Select the starting day.
Month - Select the starting month.
Hours - Select the starting hour.
Minutes - Select the starting minute.
: Click to apply changes.
60
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-2-9 Time Information Page Screenshot
Object
Current Data/Time
SNTP
Time Zone
Daylight Saving Time
Daylight Saving Time
Offset
From
To
Description
Display the current data/time
Display the current SNTP state
Display the current time zone
Display the current daylight saving time state
Display the current daylight saving time offset state
Display the current daylight saving time from
Display the current daylight saving time to
61
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.2.5.2 SNTP Server Settings
The SNTP Server Configuration screens in Figure 4-2-10 & Figure 4-2-11 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-2-10 SNTP Setup Page Screenshot
Buttons
Object
SNTP Server Address
Server Port
Description
Type the IP address or domain name of the SNTP server
Type the port number of the SNTP
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-2-11 SNTP
Server Information
Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
SNTP Server Address
Display the current SNTP server address
Server Port
Display the current SNTP server port
62
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.2.6 Log Management
The Managed Switch log management is provided here. The local logs allow you to configure and limit system messages that are logged to flash or RAM memory. The default is for event levels 0 to 3 to be logged to flash and levels 0 to 6 to be logged to
RAM. The following table lists the event levels of the Managed Switch:
Level Severity Name
7
6
Debug
Debugging messages
Informational
Informational messages only
5
4
Notice
Warning
Description
Normal but significant condition, such as cold start
Warning conditions (e.g., return false, unexpected return)
3
2
Error
Critical
Error conditions (e.g., invalid input, default used)
Critical conditions (e.g., memory allocation, or free memory error - resource exhausted)
1
0
Alert
Emergency
Immediate action needed
System unusable
4.2.6.1 Local Log
The switch system local log information is provided here. The local Log screens in Figure 4-2-12 & Figure 4-2-13 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-2-12 Logging Settings Page Screenshot
Object
Logging Service
Description
Enabled: Enable logging service operation.
Disabled: Disable logging service operation.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
63
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-2-13 Logging Information Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Logging Service
Description
Display the current logging service status
4.2.6.2 Local Log
The switch system local log information is provided here. The local Log screens in Figure 4-2-14 & Figure 4-2-15 appear.
Figure 4-2-14 Local Log Target Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Target
Severity
Description
The target of the local log entry. The following target types are supported:
Buffered: Target the buffer of the local log.
File: Target the file of the local log.
The severity of the local log entry. The following severity types are supported:
emerg: Emergency level of the system unstable for local log.
alert: Alert level of the immediate action needed for local log.
crit: Critical level of the critical conditions for local log.
error: Error level of the error conditions for local log.
warning: Warning level of the warning conditions for local log.
notice: Notice level of the normal but significant conditions for local log.
info: Informational level of the informational messages for local log.
debug: Debug level of the debugging messages for local log.
64
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-2-15 Local Log Setting Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Status
Target
Severity
Action
Description
Display the current local log state
Display the current local log target
Display the current local log severity
: Delete the current status
4.2.6.3 Remote Syslog
Configure remote syslog on this page. The Remote Syslog page allows you to configure the logging of messages that are sent to syslog servers or other management stations. You can also limit the event messages sent to only those messages below a specified level.
65
The Remote Syslog screens in Figure 4-2-16 & Figure 4-2-17 appear.
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-2-16 Remote Log Target Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Server Address
Server Port
Severity
Buttons
Facility
: Click to apply changes.
Description
Provide the remote syslog IP address of this switch.
Provide the port number of remote syslog server.
Default Port no.: 514
The severity of the local log entry. The following severity types are supported:
emerg: Emergency level of the system unstable for local log.
alert: Alert level of the immediate action needed for local log.
crit: Critical level of the critical conditions for local log.
error: Error level of the error conditions for local log.
warning: Warning level of the warning conditions for local log.
notice: Notice level of the normal but significant conditions for local log.
info: Informational level of the informational messages for local log.
debug: Debug level of the debugging messages for local log.
Local0~7: local user 0~7
Figure 4-2-17 Remote Log Setting Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Status
Description
Display the current remote syslog state
66
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Server Info
Severity
Facility
Action
Display the current remote syslog server information
Display the current remote syslog severity
Display the current remote syslog facility
: Delete the remote server entry
4.2.6.4 Log Message
The switch log view is provided here. The Log View screens in Figure 4-2-18 , Figure 4-2-19 & Figure 4-2-20 appear.
Figure 4-2-18 Log Information Select Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Target
Severity
Category
Description
The target of the log view entry. The following target types are supported:
Buffered: Target the buffered of the log view.
File: Target the file of the log view.
The severity of the log view entry. The following severity types are supported:
emerg: Emergency level of the system unstable for log view.
alert: Alert level of the immediate action needed for log view.
crit: Critical level of the critical conditions for log view.
error: Error level of the error conditions for log view.
warning: Warning level of the warning conditions for log view.
notice: Notice level of the normal but significant conditions for log view.
info: Informational level of the informational messages for log view.
debug: Debug level of the debugging messages for log view.
The category of the log view includes:
AAA, ACL, CABLE_DIAG, DAI, DHCP_SNOOPING, Dot1X, GVRP,
IGMP_SNOOPING, IPSG, L2, LLDP, Mirror, MLD_SNOOPING, Platform, PM,
Port, PORT_SECURITY, QoS, Rate, SNMP and STP
Buttons
: Click to view log.
67
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-2-19 Logging Information Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Target
Severity
Category
Total Entries
Description
Display the current log target
Display the current log severity
Display the current log category
Display the current log entries
Figure 4-2-20 Logging Messages Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Buttons
Object
No.
Timestamp
Category
Severity
Message
: Click to clear the log.
Description
This is the number for logs
Display the time of log
Display the category type
Display the severity type
Display the log message
: Click to refresh the log.
68
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.2.7 SNMP Management
4.2.7.1 SNMP Overview
The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an application layer protocol that facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices. It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) protocol suite. SNMP enables network administrators to manage network performance, find and solve network problems, and plan for network growth.
An SNMP-managed network consists of three key components: Network management stations (NMS’s), SNMP agents,
Management information base (MIB) and network-management protocol:
。
Network management stations (NMS’s): Sometimes called consoles, these devices execute management applications that monitor and control network elements. Physically, NMS’s are usually engineering workstation-caliber computers with fast CPUs, megapixel color displays, substantial memory, and abundant disk space. At least one NMS must be present in each managed environment.
。
Agents：Agents are software modules that reside in network elements. They collect and store management information such as the number of error packets received by a network element.
。
Management information base (MIB)：A MIB is a collection of managed objects residing in a virtual information store.
Collections of related managed objects are defined in specific MIB modules.
。
Network-management protocol：A management protocol is used to convey management information between agents and NMS’s. SNMP is the Internet community's de facto standard management protocol.
SNMP Operations
SNMP itself is a simple request/response protocol. NMS’s can send multiple requests without receiving a response.
。
Get -- Allows the NMS to retrieve an object instance from the agent.
。
Set -- Allows the NMS to set values for object instances within an agent.
。
Trap -- Used by the agent to asynchronously inform the NMS of some event. The SNMPv2 trap message is designed to replace the SNMPv1 trap message.
SNMP community
An SNMP community is the group that devices and management stations running SNMP belong to. It helps define where information is sent. The community name is used to identify the group. An SNMP device or agent may belong to more than one
SNMP community. It will not respond to requests from management stations that do not belong to one of its communities. SNMP default communities are:
。
Write = private
。
Read = public
69
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.2.7.2 SNMP System Information
Configure SNMP setting on this page. The SNMP System global setting screens in Figure 4-2-21 & Figure 4-2-22 appear.
Figure 4-2-21 SNMP Global Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Status
Description
Indicates the SNMP mode operation. Possible modes are:
Enabled: Enable SNMP mode operation.
Disabled: Disable SNMP mode operation.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-2-22 SNMP Information Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
SNMP
Description
Display the current SNMP status
4.2.7.3 SNMP View
Configure SNMPv3 view table on this page. The entry index keys are View Name and OID Subtree. The SNMPv3 View Table
Setting screens in Figure 4-2-23 and Figure 4-2-24 appear.
70
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-2-23 SNMPv3 View Table Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
View Name
Subtree OID
View Type
Subtree OID Mask
Description
A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to.
The allowed string length is 1 to 16.
The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view.
The allowed string content is digital number or asterisk (*).
The bitmask identifies which positions in the specified object identifier are to be regarded as "wildcards" for the purpose of pattern-matching.
Indicates the view type that this entry should belong to. Possible view type are:
included: An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be included.
excluded: An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be excluded.
General, if a view entry's view type is 'excluded', it should exist another view entry in which view type is 'included' and its OID subtree oversteps the 'excluded' view entry.
Buttons
: Click to add a new view entry.
Figure 4-2-24 SNMP View Table Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
71
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Object
View Name
Subtree OID
OID Mask
View Type
Action
Description
Display the current SNMP view name
Display the current SNMP subtree OID
Display the current SNMP OID mask
Display the current SNMP view type
: Delete the view table entry.
4.2.7.4 SNMP Access Group
Configure SNMPv3 access group on this page. The entry index keys are Group Name, Security Model and Security Level.
The SNMPv3 Access Group Setting screens in Figure 4-2-25 & Figure 4-2-26 appear.
Figure 4-2-25 SNMPv3 Access Group Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Group Name
Security Model
Security Level
Description
A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to.
The allowed string length is 1 to 16.
Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to.
Possible security models are:
v1: Reserved for SNMPv1.
v2c: Reserved for SNMPv2c.
V3: Reserved for SNMPv3 or User-based Security Model (USM)
Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to.
Possible security models are:
Noauth: None authentication and none privacy security levels are assigned to the group.
auth: Authentication and none privacy.
priv: Authentication and privacy.
Note: The Security Level applies to SNNPv3 only.
72
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Read View Name
Write View Name
Notify View Name
Buttons
: Click to add a new access entry.
: Check to delete the entry.
Read view name is the name of the view in which you can only view the contents of the agent.
The allowed string length is 1 to 16.
Write view name is the name of the view in which you enter data and configure the contents of the agent.
The allowed string length is 1 to 16.
Notify view name is the name of the view in which you specify a notify, inform, or trap.
Figure 4-2-26 SNMP View Table Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Group Name
Security Model
Security Level
Read View Name
Write View Name
Notify View Name
Action
Description
Display the current SNMP access group name
Display the current security model
Display the current security level
Display the current read view name
Display the current write view name
Display the current notify view name
: Delete the access group entry.
73
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.2.7.5 SNMP Community
Configure SNMP Community on this page. The SNMP Community screens in Figure 4-2-27 & Figure 4-2-28 appear.
Figure 4-2-27 Community Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Community Name
Community Mode
Group Name
View Name
Access Right
Description
Indicates the community read/write access string to permit access to SNMP agent.
The allowed string length is 0 to 16.
Indicates the SNMP community supported mode. Possible versions are:
Basic: Set SNMP community mode supported version 1 and 2c.
Advanced: Set SNMP community mode supported version 3.
A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to.
The allowed string length is 1 to 16.
A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to.
The allowed string length is 1 to 16.
Indicates the SNMP community type operation. Possible types are:
RO=Read-Only: Set access string type in read-only mode.
RW=Read-Write: Set access string type in read-write mode.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-2-28 Community Status Page Screenshot
74
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Community Name
Group Name
View Name
Access Right
Delete
Description
Display the current community type
Display the current SNMP access group’s name
Display the current view name
Display the current access type
: Delete the community entry
4.2.7.6 SNMP User
Configure SNMPv3 users table on this page. Each SNMPv3 user is defined by a unique name. Users must be configured with a specific security level and assigned to a group. The SNMPv3 group restricts users to a specific read, write, and notify view. The entry index key is User Name. The SNMPv3 User Setting screens in Figure 4-2-29 & Figure 4-2-30 appear.
Figure 4-2-29 SNMPv3 Users Configuration Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
User Name
Group
Privilege Mode
Authentication
Protocol
Description
A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to.
The allowed string length is 1 to 16.
The SNMP Access Group. A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to.
Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security models are:
NoAuth: None authentication and none privacy.
Auth: Authentication and none privacy.
Priv: Authentication and privacy.
The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists. That means you must first ensure that the value is set correctly.
Indicates the authentication protocol that this entry should belong to. Possible authentication protocols are:
None: None authentication protocol.
75
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Buttons
Authentication
Password
Encryption Protocol
Encryption Key
MD5: An optional flag to indicate that this user using MD5 authentication protocol.
SHA: An optional flag to indicate that this user using SHA authentication protocol.
The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists. That means you must first ensure that the value is set correctly.
A string identifying the authentication pass phrase. For both MD5 and SHA authentication protocols, the allowed string length is 8 to 16.
Indicates the privacy protocol that this entry should belong to. Possible privacy protocol are:
None: None privacy protocol.
DES: An optional flag to indicate that this user using DES authentication protocol.
A string identifying the privacy pass phrase.
The allowed string length is 8 to 16.
: Click to add a new user entry.
Figure 4-2-30 SNMPv3 Users Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
User Name
Group
Privilege Mode
Description
Display the current user name
Display the current group
Display the current privilege mode
Authentication Protocol
Display the current authentication protocol
Encryption Protocol
Display the current encryption protocol
Access Right
Action
Display the current access right
: Delete the user entry
76
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.2.7.7 SNMPv1, 2 Notification Recipients
Configure SNMPv1 and 2 notification recipients on this page. The SNMPv1, 2 Notification Recipients screens in Figure 4-2-31 &
Figure 4-2-32 appear.
Figure 4-2-31 SNMPv1, 2 Notification Recipients Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Server Address
SNMP Version
Notify Type
Community Name
UDP Port
Buttons
Time Out
Retries
Description
Indicates the SNMP trap destination address. It allows a valid IP address in dotted decimal notation ('x.y.z.w'). It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address. For example, '::192.1.2.34'.
Indicates the SNMP trap supported version. Possible versions are:
SNMP v1: Set SNMP trap supported version 1.
SNMP v2c: Set SNMP trap supported version 2c.
Set the notify type in traps or informs.
Indicates the community access string when send SNMP trap packet.
Indicates the SNMP trap destination port. SNMP Agent will send SNMP message via this port, the port range is 1~65535.
Indicates the SNMP trap inform timeout. The allowed range is 1 to 300.
Indicates the SNMP trap inform retry times. The allowed range is 1 to 255.
: Click to add a new SNMPv1, 2 host entry.
Figure 4-2-32 SNMPv1, 2 Host Status Page Screenshot
77
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Server Address
SNMP Version
Notify Type
Community Name
UDP Port
Time Out
Retries
Action
Description
Display the current server address
Display the current SNMP version
Display the current notify type
Display the current community name
Display the current UDP port
Display the current time out
Display the current retry times
4.2.7.8 SNMPv3 Notification Recipients
: Delete the SNMPv1, 2 host entry.
Configure SNMPv3 notification recipients on this page. The SNMPv1, 2 Notification Recipients screens in Figure 4-2-33 &
Figure 4-2-34 appear.
Figure 4-2-33 SNMPv3 Notification Recipients Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Server Address
Notify Type
User Name
UDP Port
Time Out
Description
Indicates the SNMP trap destination address. It allows a valid IP address in dotted decimal notation ('x.y.z.w'). It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address. For example, '::192.1.2.34'.
Set the notify type in traps or informs.
Indicates the user string when send SNMP trap packet.
Indicates the SNMP trap destination port. SNMP Agent will send SNMP message via this port, the port range is 1~65535.
Indicates the SNMP trap inform timeout. The allowed range is 1 to 300.
78
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Buttons
Retries
Indicates the SNMP trap inform retry times. The allowed range is 1 to 255.
: Click to add a new SNMPv3 host entry.
Figure 4-2-34 SNMPv3 Host Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Server Address
Notify Type
User Name
UDP Port
Time Out
Retries
Action
Description
Display the current server address
Display the current notify type
Display the current user name
Display the current UDP port
Display the current time out
Display the current retry times
: Delete the SNMPv3 host entry
4.2.7.9 SNMP Engine ID
Configure SNMPv3 Engine ID on this page. The entry index key is Engine ID. The remote engine ID is used to compute the security digest for authenticating and encrypting packets sent to a user on the remote host. The SNMPv3 Engine ID Setting screens in Figure 4-2-35 & Figure 4-2-36 appear.
Figure 4-2-35 SNMPv3 Engine ID Setting Page Screenshot
79
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Engine ID
Description
An octet string identifying the engine ID that this entry should belong to. The string must contain an even number between 10 and 64 hexadecimal digits, but all-zeros and all-'F's are not allowed.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-2-36 SNMPv3 Engine ID Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
User Default
Engine ID
Description
Display the current status
Display the current engine ID
4.2.7.10 SNMP Remote Engine ID
Configure SNMPv3 remote Engine ID on this page. The SNMPv3 Remote Engine ID Setting screens in Figure 4-2-37 & Figure
4-2-38 appear.
Figure 4-2-37 SNMPv3 Remote Engine ID Setting Page Screenshot
80
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Remote IP Address
Buttons
Engine ID
: Click to apply changes.
Description
Indicates the SNMP remote engine ID address. It allows a valid IP address in dotted decimal notation ('x.y.z.w').
An octet string identifying the engine ID that this entry should belong to.
Figure 4-2-38 SNMPv3 Remote Engine ID Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Remote IP Address
Engine ID
Action
Description
Display the current remote IP address
Display the current engine ID
: Delete the remote IP address entry
81
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.3 Port Management
Use the Port Menu to display or configure the Managed Switch's ports. This section has the following items:
Port Configuration
Port Counters
Bandwidth Utilization
Port Mirroring
Jumbo Frame
Port Error Disable
Configuration
Configures port configuration settings
Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics
Displays current bandwidth utilization
Sets the source and target ports for mirroring
Sets the jumbo frame on the switch
Configures port error disable settings
Port Error Disabled Status
Disables port error status
Protected Ports
Configures protected ports settings
EEE
SFP Module Information
Configures EEE settings
Displays SFP module information.
4.3.1 Port Configuration
This page displays current port configurations and status. Ports can also be configured here. The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in a number of columns, which are:
The Port Configuration screens in Figure 4-3-1 & Figure 4-3-2 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-3-1 Port Settings Page Screenshot
Object
Port Select
Enabled
Description
Select port number from this drop-down list.
Indicates the port state operation. Possible state are:
Enabled - Start up the port manually.
Disabled – Shut down the port manually.
82
Speed
Duplex
Flow Control
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Select any available link speed for the given switch port. Draw the menu bar to select the mode.
Auto - Setup Auto negotiation.
Auto-10M - Setup 10M Auto negotiation.
Auto-100M - Setup 100M Auto negotiation.
Auto-1000M - Setup 1000M Auto negotiation.
Auto-10/100M - Setup 10/100M Auto negotiation.
10M - Setup 10M Force mode.
100M - Setup 100M Force mode.
1000M - Setup 1000M Force mode.
Select any available link duplex for the given switch port. Draw the menu bar to select the mode.
Auto - Setup Auto negotiation.
Full - Force sets Full-Duplex mode.
Half - Force sets Half-Duplex mode.
When Auto Speed is selected for a port, this section indicates the flow control capability that is advertised to the link partner. When a fixed-speed setting is selected, that is what is used. Current Rx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed. Current Tx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are transmitted. The Rx and Tx settings are determined by the result of the last Auto-Negotiation. Check the configured column to use flow control. This setting is related to the setting for Configured Link Speed.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-3-2 Port Status Page Screenshot
83
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Object
Port
Description
Description
This is the logical port number for this row
Enable State
Link Status
Speed
Duplex
Flow Control
Configuration
Flow Control Status
4.3.2 Port Counters
Click to indicate the port name
Display the current port state
Display the current link status
Display the current speed status of the port
Display the current duplex status of the port
Display the current flow control configuration of the port
Display the current flow control status of the port
This page provides an overview of traffic and trunk statistics for all switch ports. The Port Statistics screens in Figure 4-3-3,
Figure 4-3-4 , Figure 4-3-5 & Figure 4-3-6 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-3-3 Port MIB Counters Page Screenshot
Object
Port
Mode
Description
Select port number from this drop-down list.
Select port counters mode.
Option:
All
Interface
Ether-link
RMON
84
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-3-4 Interface Counters Page Screenshot
Object
Received Octets
Received Unicast
Packets
Received Unknown
Unicast Packets
Received Discards
Packets
Transmit Octets
Transmit Unicast
Packets
Transmit Unknown
Unicast Packets
Transmit Discards
Packets
Received Multicast
Packets
Description
The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters.
The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
The number of packets received via the interface which is discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.
The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space.
The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested is transmitted to a subnetwork-unicast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested is transmitted to a subnetwork-unicast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.
The number of inbound packets which is chosen to be discarded even though no errors have been detected to prevent from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space.
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-) layer, is addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer.
85
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Received Broadcast
Packets
Transmit Multicast
Packets
Transmit Broadcast
Packets
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-) layer, addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer.
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested is transmitted and is addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent.
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested is transmitted, and addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent.
Figure 4-3-5 Ethernet link Counters Page Screenshot
Object
Alignment Errors
FCS Errors
Single Collision
Frames
Multiple Collision
Frames
Deferred
Transmissions
Late Collision
Excessive Collision
Description
The number of alignment errors (missynchronized data packets).
A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check. This count does not include frames received with frame-too-long or frame-too-short error.
The number of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision.
A count of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision.
A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a particular interface is delayed because the medium was busy.
The number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit-times into the transmission of a packet.
A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisions. This counter does not increase when the interface is
86
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Frame Too Long
Symbol Errors
Control In Unknown
Opcodes
In Pause Frames
Out Pause Frames operating in full-duplex mode.
A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceeds the maximum permitted frame size.
The number of received and transmitted symbol errors
The number of received control unknown opcodes
The number of received pause frames
The number of transmitted pause frames
Figure 4-3-6 RMON Counters Page Screenshot
Object
Drop Events
Octets
Packets
Broadcast Packets
Description
The total number of events in which packets were dropped due to lack of resources.
The total number of octets received and transmitted on the interface, including framing characters.
The total number of packets received and transmitted on the interface.
The total number of good frames received that were directed to the broadcast address. Note that this does not include multicast packets.
87
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Multicast Packets
The total number of good frames received that were directed to this multicast address.
The number of CRC/alignment errors (FCS or alignment errors).
CRC / Alignment
Errors
Undersize Packets
Oversize Packets
Fragments
Jabbers
The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets long(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets in length
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and had either an FCS or alignment error.
The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and had either an FCS or alignment error.
The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.
Collisions
64 Bytes Frames
65-127 Byte Frames
128-255 Byte Frames
256-511 Byte Frames
512-1023 Byte Frames
1024-1518 Byte
Frames
The total number of frames (including bad packets) received and transmitted that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
The total number of frames (including bad packets) received and transmitted where the number of octets falls within the specified range (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
88
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.3.3 Bandwidth Utilization
The Bandwidth Utilization page displays the percentage of the total available bandwidth being used on the ports. Bandwidth utilization statistics can be viewed using a line graph. The Bandwidth Utilization screen in Figure 4-3-7 appears.
To view the port utilization, click on the Port Management folder and then the Bandwidth Utilization link:
Figure 4-3-7 Port Bandwidth Utilization Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Refresh Period
IFG
Description
This shows the period interval between last and next refresh.
Options:
2
5
10
Allow user to enable or disable this function
89
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.3.4 Port Mirroring
Configure port Mirroring on this page. This function provides monitoring of network traffic that forwards a copy of each incoming or outgoing packet from one port of a network switch to another port where the packet can be studied. It enables the manager to keep close track of switch performance and alter it if necessary.
To debug network problems, selected traffic can be copied, or mirrored, to a mirror port where a frame analyzer can be attached to analyze the frame flow.
The Managed Switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a monitor port. You can then attach a protocol analyzer or RMON probe to this port to perform traffic analysis and verify connection integrity.
Figure 4-3-8 Port Mirror Application
The traffic to be copied to the mirror port is selected as follows:
All frames received on a given port (also known as ingress or source mirroring).
All frames transmitted on a given port (also known as egress or destination mirroring).
Mirror Port Configuration
The Port Mirror Configuration screens in Figure 4-3-9 & Figure 4-3-10 appear.
Figure 4-3-9 Port Mirroring Settings Page Screenshot
90
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Buttons
Object
Session ID
Sniffer RX Ports
Description
Set the port mirror session ID.
Possible ID are: 1 to 4.
Monitor Session State
Enable or disable the port mirroring function.
Destination Port
Allow-ingress
Select the port to mirror destination port.
Frames from ports that have either source (rx) or destination (tx) mirroring enabled are mirrored to this port.
Sniffer TX Ports
Frames transmitted from these ports are mirrored to the mirroring port. Frames received are not mirrored.
Frames received at these ports are mirrored to the mirroring port.
Frames transmitted are not mirrored.
: Click to apply changes.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-3-10 Mirroring Status Page Screenshot
Object
Session ID
Destination Port
Ingress State
Source TX Port
Source RX Port
Description
Display the session ID
This is the mirroring port entry
Display the ingress state
Display the current TX ports
Display the current RX ports
91
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.3.5 Jumbo Frame
This page provides to select the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port. The Jumbo Frame screen in Figure 4-3-11 &
Figure 4-3-12 appear.
Figure 4-3-11 Jumbo Frame Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Buttons
Object
Jumbo Frame (Bytes)
Description
Enter the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port, including FCS.
The allowed range is 64 bytes to 9216 bytes.
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-3-12 Jumbo Frame Information Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Jumbo
Description
Display the current maximum frame size
92
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.3.6 Port Error Disabled Configuration
This page provides to set port error disable function. The Port Error Disable Configuration screens in Figure 4-3-13 & Figure
4-3-14 appear.
Figure 4-3-13 Error Disabled Recovery Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Recovery Interval
BPDU Guard
Self Loop
Broadcast Flood
Unknown Multicast
Flood
Unicast Flood
ACL
Port Security
Violation
DHCP Rate Limit
ARP Rate Limit
Description
The period (in seconds) for which a port will be kept disabled in the event of a port error is detected (and the port action shuts down the port).
Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by BPDU guard.
Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by self loop.
Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by broadcast flood.
Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by unknown multicast flood.
Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by unicast flood.
Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by ACL.
Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by port security violation.
Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by DHCP rate limit
Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by ARP rate limit
93
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-3-14 Error Disabled Information Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Recovery Interval
BPDU Guard
Self Loop
Broadcast Flood
Unknown Multicast
Flood
Description
Display the current recovery interval time
Display the current BPDU guard status
Display the current self loop status
Display the current broadcast flood status
Display the current unknown multicast flood status
Unicast Flood
Display the current unicast flood status
ACL
Display the current ACL status
Port Security Violation
Display the current port security violation status
DHCP Rate Limit
ARP Rate Limit
Display the current DHCP rate limit status
Display the current ARP rate limit status
94
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.3.7 Port Error Disabled
This page provides disable that transitions a port into error disable and the recovery options.
The ports were disabled by some protocols such as BPDU Guard, Loopback and UDLD. The Port Error Disable screen in
Figure 4-3-15 appears.
Figure 4-3-15 Port Error Disable Page Screenshot
The displayed counters are:
Object
Port Name
Description
Display the port for error disable
Error Disable Reason
Display the error disabled reason of the port
Time Left (Seconds)
Display the time left
4.3.8 Protected Ports
Overview
When a switch port is configured to be a member of protected group (also called Private VLAN), communication between protected ports within that group can be prevented. Two application examples are provided in this section:
Customers connected to an ISP can be members of the protected group, but they are not allowed to communicate with each other within that VLAN.
Servers in a farm of web servers in a Demilitarized Zone (DMZ) are allowed to communicate with the outside world and with database servers on the inside segment, but are not allowed to communicate with each other
95
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
For protected port group to be applied, the Managed switch must first be configured for standard VLAN operation. Ports in a protected port group fall into one of these two groups:
Promiscuous (Unprotected) ports
— Ports from which traffic can be forwarded to all ports in the private VLAN
— Ports which can receive traffic from all ports in the private VLAN
Isolated (Protected) ports
— Ports from which traffic can only be forwarded to promiscuous ports in the private VLAN
— Ports which can receive traffic from only promiscuous ports in the private VLAN
The configuration of promiscuous and isolated ports applies to all private VLANs. When traffic comes in on a promiscuous port in a private VLAN, the VLAN mask from the VLAN table is applied. When traffic comes in on an isolated port, the private VLAN mask is applied in addition to the VLAN mask from the VLAN table. This reduces the ports to which forwarding can be done to just the promiscuous ports within the private VLAN.
The port settings relate to the currently unit, as reflected by the page header. The Port Isolation Configuration screens in Figure
4-3-16 & Figure 4-3-17 appear.
96
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-3-16 Protected Ports Settings Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port List
Port Type
Description
Select port number from this drop-down list.
Displays protected port types.
- Protected: A single stand-alone VLAN that contains one promiscuous port and one or more isolated (or host) ports. This VLAN conveys traffic between the isolated ports and a lone promiscuous port.
- Unprotected: A promiscuous port can communicate with all the interfaces within a private VLAN. This is the default setting.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-3-17 Port Isolation Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Protected Ports
Unprotected Ports
Description
Display the current protected ports
Display the current unprotected ports
97
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.3.9 EEE
What is EEE
EEE is a power saving option that reduces the power usage when there is low or no traffic utilization. EEE works by powering down circuits when there is no traffic. When a port gets data to be transmitted all circuits are powered up. The time it takes to power up the circuits is named wakeup time. The default wakeup time is 17 us for 1Gbit links and 30 us for other link speeds.
EEE devices must agree upon the value of the wakeup time in order to make sure that both the receiving and transmitting device has all circuits powered up when traffic is transmitted. The devices can exchange wakeup time information using the
LLDP protocol. EEE works for ports in auto-negotiation mode, where the port is negotiated to either 1G or 100 Mbit full duplex mode. For ports that are not EEE-capable the corresponding EEE checkboxes are grayed out and thus impossible to enable
EEE for. The EEE port settings relate to the currently unit, as reflected by the page header.
When a port is powered down for saving power, outgoing traffic is stored in a buffer until the port is powered up again. Because there are some overhead in turning the port down and up, more power can be saved if the traffic can be buffered up until a large burst of traffic can be transmitted. Buffering traffic will give some latency in the traffic.
The EEE Port Settings screen in Figure 4-3-18 & Figure 4-3-19 appears.
Figure 4-3-18 EEE Port Settings Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Buttons
Object
Port
Enable
: Click to apply changes.
Description
Select port number from this drop-down list
Enable or disable the EEE function
98
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-3-19 EEE Enable Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
EEE State
Description
The switch port number of the logical port
Display the current EEE state
4.3.10 SFP Module Information
Managed switch has supported the SFP module with digital diagnostics monitoring (DDM) function, this feature is also known as digital optical monitoring (DOM). You can check the physical or operational status of an SFP module via the SFP
Module Information Page. This Page shows the operational status, such as the transceiver type, speed, wavelength, optical output power, optical input power, temperature, laser bias current and transceiver supply voltage in real time. You can also use the hyperlink of port no. to check the statistics on a specific interface.
4.3.10.1 SFP Module Status
The SFP Module Status screens in Figure 4-3-20 & Figure 4-3-21 appear.
Figure 4-3-20 Port Selected Page Screenshot with Sample Switch
99
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
Description
Select port number from this drop-down list
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-3-21 Fiber Port Status Page Screenshot
Object
OE-Present
LOS
Description
Display the current SFP OE-present
Display the current SFP LOS
100
4.3.10.1 SFP Module Detail Status
The SFP Module Detail Status screen in Figure 4-3-22 appears.
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-3-22 SFP Module Detail Status Page Screenshot with Sample Switch
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
Temperature
Voltage
Current
Output Power
Input Power
Transmit Fault
Loss of Signal
Rate Ready
Description
The logical port for the settings contained in the same row
Display the current SFP temperature
Display the current SFP voltage
Display the current SFP current
Display the current SFP output power
Display the current SFP input power
Display the current SFP transmits fault
Display the current SFP loss of signal.
Display the current SFP rate ready.
101
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.4 Link Aggregation
Port Aggregation optimizes port usage by linking a group of ports together to form a single Link Aggregated Groups (LAGs). Port
Aggregation multiplies the bandwidth between the devices, increases port flexibility, and provides link redundancy.
Each LAG is composed of ports of the same speed, set to full-duplex operations. Ports in a LAG can be of different media types
(UTP/Fiber, or different fiber types) provided they operate at the same speed.
Aggregated Links can be assigned manually (Port Trunk) or automatically by enabling Link Aggregation Control Protocol
(LACP) on the relevant links.
Aggregated Links are treated by the system as a single logical port. Specifically, the Aggregated Link has similar port attributes to a non-aggregated port, including auto-negotiation, speed, suplex setting, etc.
The device supports the following Aggregation links :
Static LAGs (Port Trunk) – Force aggregated selected ports to be a trunk group.
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) LAGs - LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a different device. If the other device ports are also LACP ports, the devices establish a LAG between them.
Figure 4-4-1 Link Aggregation
102
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) provides a standardized means for exchanging information between Partner
Systems that require high-speed redundant links. Link aggregation lets you group up to eight consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection. This feature can expand bandwidth to a device on the network. LACP operation requires full-duplex mode. For more detailed information, refer to the IEEE 802.3ad standard.
Port link aggregations can be used to increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery. Link aggregation lets you group up to 8 consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection between any two the Switch or other
Layer 2 switches. However, before making any physical connections between devices, use the Link Aggregation Configuration menu to specify the link aggregation on the devices at both ends. When using a port link aggregation, note that:
The ports used in a link aggregation must all be of the same media type (RJ45, 100 Mbps fiber).
The ports that can be assigned to the same link aggregation have certain other restrictions (see below).
Ports can only be assigned to one link aggregation.
The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as link aggregation ports.
None of the ports in a link aggregation can be configured as a mirror source port or a mirror target port.
All of the ports in a link aggregation have to be treated as a whole when moved from/to, added or deleted from a VLAN.
The Spanning Tree Protocol will treat all the ports in a link aggregation as a whole.
Enable the link aggregation prior to connecting any cable between the switches to avoid creating a data loop.
Disconnect all link aggregation port cables or disable the link aggregation ports before removing a port link aggregation to avoid creating a data loop.
It allows a maximum of 8 ports to be aggregated at the same time. The Managed Switch supports Gigabit Ethernet ports (up to 8 groups). If the group is defined as an LACP static link aggregation group, then any extra ports selected are placed in a standby mode for redundancy if one of the other ports fails. If the group is defined as a local static link aggregation group, then the number of ports must be the same as the group member ports.
Use the Link Aggregation Menu to display or configure the Trunk function. This section has the following items:
LAG Setting
LAG Management
LAG Port Setting
LACP Setting
LACP Port Setting
LAG Status
Configures load balance algorithm configuration settings
Configures LAG configuration settings
Configures LAG port settings
Configures LACP priority settings
Configure LACP configuration settings
Display LAG status / LACP information
103
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.4.1 LAG Setting
This page allows configuring load balance algorithm configuration settings. The LAG Setting screens in Figure 4-4-2 & Figure
4-4-3 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-4-2 LAG Setting Page Screenshot
Object
Load Balance
Algorithm
Description
Select load balance algorithm mode:
MAC Address: The MAC address can be used to calculate the port for the frame.
IP/MAC Address: The IP and MAC address can be used to calculate the port for the frame.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-4-3 LAG Information Page Screenshot
Object
Load Balance
Algorithm
Description
Display the current load balance algorithm
104
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.4.2 LAG Management
This page is used to configure the LAG management. The LAG Management screens in Figure 4-4-4 & Figure 4-4-5 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-4-4 LAG Management Page Screenshot
Object
LAG
Name
Type
Ports
Description
Select LAG number from this drop-down list
Indicates each LAG name
Indicates the trunk type
Static: Force aggregated selected ports to be a trunk group.
LACP: LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a different device. If the other device ports are also LACP ports, the devices establish a LAG between them.
Select port number from this drop-down list to establish Link Aggregation
Figure 4-4-5 LAG Management Information Page Screenshot
105
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Object
LAG
Name
Type
Link State
Active Member
Standby Member
Modify
Description
The LAG for the settings contained in the same row
Display the current name
Display the current type
Display the link state
Display the active member
Display the standby member
Click to modify LAG configuration
PoE Ports of WGS-804HPT will not be a LAG group.
4.4.3 LAG Port Setting
This page allows setting configuration for each LAG. The LAG Port Setting screens in Figure 4-4-6 & Figure 4-4-7 appear.
Figure 4-4-6 LAG Port Setting Information Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
LAG Select
Enable
Speed
Description
Select LAG number from this drop-down list.
Indicates the LAG state operation. Possible states are:
Enabled - Start up the LAG manually.
Disabled – Shut down the LAG manually.
Select any available link speed for the given switch port. Draw the menu bar to select the mode.
Auto – Set up Auto negotiation.
Auto-10M – Set up 10M Auto negotiation.
106
Flow Control
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Auto-100M – Set up 100M Auto negotiation.
Auto-1000M - Set up 1000M Auto negotiation.
Auto-10/100M – Set up 10/100M Auto negotiation.
10M – Set up 10M Force mode.
100M – Set up 100M Force mode.
1000M – Set up 1000M Force mode.
When Auto Speed is selected for a port, this section indicates the flow control capability that is advertised to the link partner. When a fixed-speed setting is selected, that is what is used. The current Rx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed. The current Tx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are transmitted. The Rx and Tx settings are determined by the result of the last Auto-Negotiation. Check the configured column to use flow control. This setting is related to the setting for Configured Link Speed.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-4-7 LAG Port Status Page Screenshot
Object
LAG
Description
Port Type
Enable State
Speed
Description
The LAG for the settings contained in the same row
Display the current description
Display the current port type
Display the current enable state
Display the current speed
107
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Duplex
Flow Control Config
Flow Control Status
Display the current duplex mode
Display the current flow control configuration
Display the current flow control status
4.4.4 LACP Setting
This page is used to configure the LACP system priority setting. The LACP Setting screens in Figure 4-4-8 & Figure 4-4-9 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-4-8 LACP Setting Page Screenshot
Object
System Priority
Description
A value which is used to identify the active LACP.
The Managed Switch with the lowest value has the highest priority and is selected as the active LACP peer of the trunk group.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-4-9 LACP Information Page Screenshot
Object
System Priority
Description
Display the current system priority.
108
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.4.5 LACP Port Setting
This page is used to configure the LACP port setting. The LACP Port Setting screens in Figure 4-4-10 & Figure 4-4-11 appear.
Figure 4-4-10 LACP Port Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port Select
Priority
Timeout
Description
Select port number from this drop-down list to set LACP port setting.
The Priority controls the priority of the port.
If the LACP partner wants to form a larger group than is supported by this device, then this parameter will control which ports will be active and which ports will be in a backup role.
Lower number means greater priority.
The Timeout controls the period between BPDU transmissions.
Short will transmit LACP packets each second, while Long will wait for 30 seconds before sending an LACP packet.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-4-11 LACP Port Information Page Screenshot
109
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port Name
Priority
Timeout
Description
The switch port number of the logical port
Display the current LACP priority parameter
Display the current timeout parameter
4.4.6 LAG Status
This page displays LAG status. The LAG Status screens in Figure 4-4-12 & Figure 4-4-13 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-4-12 LAG Status Page Screenshot
Object
LAG
Name
Type
Link State
Active Member
Standby Member
Description
Display the current trunk entry
Display the current LAG name
Display the current trunk type
Display the current link state
Display the current active member
Display the current standby member
Figure 4-4-13 LACP Information Page Screenshot
110
PnKey
AtKey
Sel
Mux
Receiv
PrdTx
AtState
PnState
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Trunk
Port
PartnerSysId
Description
Display the current trunk ID
Display the current port number
The system ID of link partner. This field would be updated when the port receives
LACP PDU from link partner
Port key of partner. This field would be updated when the port receives LACP
PDU from link partner
Port key of actor. The key is designed to be the same as trunk ID.
LACP selection logic status of the port
“S” means selected
“U” means unselected
“D” means standby
LACP mux state machine status of the port
“DETACH” means the port is in detached state
“WAIT” means waiting state
“ATTACH” means attach state
“CLLCT” means collecting state
“DSTRBT” means distributing state
LACP receive state machine status of the port
“INIT” means the port is in initialize state
“PORTds” means port disabled state
“EXPR” means expired state
“LACPds” means LACP disabled state
“DFLT” means defaulted state
“CRRNT” means current state
LACP periodic transmission state machine status of the port
“no PRD” means the port is in no periodic state
“FstPRD” means fast periodic state
“SlwPRD” means slow periodic state
“PrdTX” means periodic TX state
The actor state field of LACP PDU description.
The field from left to right describes: “LACP_Activity”, “LACP_Timeout”,
“Aggregation”, “Synchronization”, “Collecting”, “Distributing”, “Defaulted”, and
“Expired”.
The contents could be true or false. If the contents are false, the web shows “_”; if the contents are true, the web shows “A”, “T”, “G”, “S”, “C”, “D”, “F” and “E” for each content respectively.
The partner state field of LACP PDU description.
The field from left to right describes: “LACP_Activity”, “LACP_Timeout”,
“Aggregation”, “Synchronization”, “Collecting”, “Distributing”, “Defaulted”, and
111
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
“Expired”.
The contents could be true or false. If the contents are false, the web will show
“_”; if the contents are true, the Web shows “A”, “T”, “G”, “S”, “C”, “D”, “F” and “E” for each content respectively.
112
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.5 VLAN
4.5.1 VLAN Overview
A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) is a network topology configured according to a logical scheme rather than the physical layout. VLAN can be used to combine any collection of LAN segments into an autonomous user group that appears as a single
LAN. VLAN also logically segment the network into different broadcast domains so that packets are forwarded only between ports within the VLAN. Typically, a VLAN corresponds to a particular subnet, although not necessarily.
VLAN can enhance performance by conserving bandwidth, and improve security by limiting traffic to specific domains.
A VLAN is a collection of end nodes grouped by logic instead of physical location. End nodes that frequently communicate with each other are assigned to the same VLAN, regardless of where they are physically on the network. Logically, a VLAN can be equated to a broadcast domain, because broadcast packets are forwarded to only members of the VLAN on which the broadcast was initiated.
1. No matter what basis is used to uniquely identify end nodes and assign these nodes VLAN membership, packets cannot cross VLAN without a network device performing a routing function between the VLAN.
2. The Managed Switch supports IEEE 802.1Q VLAN. The port untagging function can be used to remove the 802.1 tag from packet headers to maintain compatibility with devices that are tag-unaware.
The Managed Switch's default is to assign all ports to a single 802.1Q VLAN named
DEFAULT_VLAN. As new VLAN is created, the member ports assigned to the new VLAN will be removed from the DEFAULT_ VLAN port member list. The DEFAULT_VLAN has a VID = 1.
113
This section has the following items:
Management VLAN
Create VLAN
Interface Settings
Port to VLAN
Port VLAN Membership
Protocol VLAN Group
Setting
Protocol VLAN Port
Setting
GVRP Setting
GVRP Port Setting
GVRP VLAN
GVRP Statistics
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Configures the management VLAN
Creates the VLAN group
Configures mode and PVID on the VLAN port
Configures the VLAN membership
Display the VLAN membership
Configures the protocol VLAN group
Configures the protocol VLAN port setting
Configures GVRP global setting
Configures GVRP port setting
Display the GVRP VLAN database
Display the GVRP port statistics
4.5.2 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN
In large networks, routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into separate domains. This Managed Switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains.
VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the originating group, and can eliminate broadcast storms in large networks. This also provides a more secure and cleaner network environment.
An IEEE 802.1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network, but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment.
VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a new VLAN without having to change any physical connections. VLANs can be easily organized to reflect departmental groups (such as Marketing or R&D), usage groups
(such as e-mail), or multicast groups (used for multimedia applications such as videoconferencing).
VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic, and allow you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets. VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN.
This Managed Switch supports the following VLAN features:
Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802.1Q standard
Port overlapping, allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs
End stations can belong to multiple VLANs
Passing traffic between VLAN-aware and VLAN-unaware devices
114
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
■
IEEE 802.1Q Standard
IEEE 802.1Q (tagged) VLAN are implemented on the Switch. 802.1Q VLAN require tagging, which enables them to span the entire network (assuming all switches on the network are IEEE 802.1Q-compliant).
VLAN allow a network to be segmented in order to reduce the size of broadcast domains. All packets entering a VLAN will only be forwarded to the stations (over IEEE 802.1Q enabled switches) that are members of that VLAN, and this includes broadcast, multicast and unicast packets from unknown sources.
VLAN can also provide a level of security to your network. IEEE 802.1Q VLAN will only deliver packets between stations that are members of the VLAN. Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging.:
The untagging feature of IEEE 802.1Q VLAN allows VLAN to work with legacy switches that don't recognize VLAN tags in packet headers.
The tagging feature allows VLAN to span multiple 802.1Q-compliant switches through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to be enabled on all ports and work normally.
Some relevant terms:
- Tagging - The act of putting 802.1Q VLAN information into the header of a packet.
- Untagging - The act of stripping 802.1Q VLAN information out of the packet header.
■
802.1Q VLAN Tags
The figure below shows the 802.1Q VLAN tag. There are four additional octets inserted after the source MAC address. Their presence is indicated by a value of 0x8100 in the Ether Type field. When a packet's Ether Type field is equal to 0x8100, the packet carries the IEEE 802.1Q/802.1p tag. The tag is contained in the following two octets and consists of 3 bits of user priority,
1 bit of Canonical Format Identifier (CFI - used for encapsulating Token Ring packets so they can be carried across Ethernet backbones), and 12 bits of VLAN ID (VID). The 3 bits of user priority are used by 802.1p. The VID is the VLAN identifier and is used by the 802.1Q standard. Because the VID is 12 bits long, 4094 unique VLAN can be identified.
The tag is inserted into the packet header making the entire packet longer by 4 octets. All of the information originally contained in the packet is retained.
802.1Q Tag
Preamble
Destination
Address
6 bytes
User Priority CFI
3 bits 1 bits
VLAN ID (VID)
12 bits
TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier) TCI (Tag Control Information)
Source
Address
6 bytes
VLAN TAG
4 bytes
Ethernet
Type
2 bytes
Data FCS
46-1500 bytes 4 bytes
115
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The Ether Type and VLAN ID are inserted after the MAC source address, but before the original Ether Type/Length or Logical
Link Control. Because the packet is now a bit longer than it was originally, the Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) must be recalculated.
Adding an IEEE802.1Q Tag
Dest. Addr. Src. Addr. Length/E. type Data Old CRC
Original Ethernet
Dest. Addr. Src. Addr. E. type
New Tagged Packet
Priority CFI VLAN ID
■
Port VLAN ID
Packets that are tagged (are carrying the 802.1Q VID information) can be transmitted from one 802.1Q compliant network device to another with the VLAN information intact. This allows 802.1Q VLAN to span network devices (and indeed, the entire network – if all network devices are 802.1Q compliant).
Every physical port on a switch has a PVID. 802.1Q ports are also assigned a PVID, for use within the switch. If no VLAN are defined on the switch, all ports are then assigned to a default VLAN with a PVID equal to 1. Untagged packets are assigned the
PVID of the port on which they were received. Forwarding decisions are based upon this PVID, in so far as VLAN are concerned.
Tagged packets are forwarded according to the VID contained within the tag. Tagged packets are also assigned a PVID, but the
PVID is not used to make packet forwarding decisions, the VID is.
Tag-aware switches must keep a table to relate PVID within the switch to VID on the network. The switch will compare the VID of a packet to be transmitted to the VID of the port that is to transmit the packet. If the two VID are different the switch will drop the packet. Because of the existence of the PVID for untagged packets and the VID for tagged packets, tag-aware and tag-unaware network devices can coexist on the same network.
A switch port can have only one PVID, but can have as many VID as the switch has memory in its VLAN table to store them.
Because some devices on a network may be tag-unaware, a decision must be made at each port on a tag-aware device before packets are transmitted – should the packet to be transmitted have a tag or not? If the transmitting port is connected to a tag-unaware device, the packet should be untagged. If the transmitting port is connected to a tag-aware device, the packet should be tagged.
■
Default VLANs
The Switch initially configures one VLAN, VID = 1, called "default." The factory default setting assigns all ports on the Switch to the "default". As new VLAN are configured in Port-based mode, their respective member ports are removed from the "default."
116
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
■
Assigning Ports to VLANs
Before enabling VLANs for the switch, you must first assign each port to the VLAN group(s) in which it will participate. By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as untagged ports. Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or more
VLANs, and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs. Then assign ports on the other VLAN-aware network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN(s), either manually or dynamically using GVRP. However, if you want a port on this switch to participate in one or more VLANs, but none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs, then you should add this port to the VLAN as an untagged port.
VLAN-tagged frames can pass through VLAN-aware or VLAN-unaware network interconnection devices, but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it on to any end-node host that does not support VLAN tagging.
■
VLAN Classification
When the switch receives a frame, it classifies the frame in one of two ways. If the frame is untagged, the switch assigns the frame to an associated VLAN (based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port). But if the frame is tagged, the switch uses the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast domain of the frame.
■
Port Overlapping
Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly shared network resources among different VLAN groups, such as file servers or printers. Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap, but still need to communicate, you can connect them by enabled routing on this switch.
■
Untagged VLANs
Untagged (or static) VLANs are typically used to reduce broadcast traffic and to increase security. A group of network users assigned to a VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the switch. Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN. Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets.
117
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.5.3 Management VLAN
Configure Management VLAN on this page. The screens in Figure 4-5-1 & Figure 4-5-2 appear.
Figure 4-5-1 Management VLAN Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Management VLAN
Description
Provide the managed VLAN ID
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-5-2 Management VLAN State Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Management VLAN
Description
Display the current management VLAN.
118
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.5.4 Create VLAN
Create/delete VLAN on this page. The screens in Figure 4-5-3 & Figure 4-5-4 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-5-3 VLAN Setting Page Screenshot
Buttons
Object
VLAN List
VLAN Action
VLAN Name Prefix
: Click to apply changes.
Description
Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN.
This column allows users to add or delete VLAN s.
Indicates the name of this particular VLAN.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-5-4 VLAN Table Page Screenshot
Object
VLAN ID
VLAN Name
VLAN Type
Modify
Description
Display the current VLAN ID entry
Display the current VLAN ID name
Display the current VLAN ID type
Click to modify VLAN configuration
119
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.5.5 Interface Settings
This page is used for configuring the Managed Switch port VLAN. The VLAN per Port Configuration Page contains fields for managing ports that are part of a VLAN. The port default VLAN ID (PVID) is configured on the VLAN Port Configuration Page.
All untagged packets arriving to the device are tagged by the ports PVID.
Understand nomenclature of the Switch
■
IEEE 802.1Q Tagged and Untagged
Every port on an 802.1Q compliant switch can be configured as tagged or untagged.
Tagged: Ports with tagging enabled will put the VID number, priority and other VLAN information into the header of all packets that flow into those ports. If a packet has previously been tagged, the port will not alter the packet, thus keeping the VLAN information intact. The VLAN information in the tag can then be used by other 802.1Q compliant devices on the network to make packet-forwarding decisions.
Untagged: Ports with untagging enabled will strip the 802.1Q tag from all packets that flow into those ports. If the packet doesn't have an 802.1Q VLAN tag, the port will not alter the packet. Thus, all packets received by and forwarded by an untagging port will have no 802.1Q VLAN information. (Remember that the PVID is only used internally within the Switch). Untagging is used to send packets from an 802.1Q-compliant network device to a non-compliant network device.
Frame Income
Frame Leave
Income Frame is tagged
Leave port is tagged Frame remains tagged
Income Frame is untagged
Tag is inserted
Leave port is untagged Tag is removed Frame remain untagged
Table 4-5-1: Ingress / Egress Port with VLAN VID Tag / Untag Table
■
IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling (Q-in-Q)
IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling (Q-in-Q) is designed for service providers carrying traffic for multiple customers across their networks.
Q-in-Q tunneling is used to maintain customer-specific VLAN and Layer 2 protocol configurations even when different customers use the same internal VLAN IDs. This is accomplished by inserting Service Provider VLAN (SPVLAN) tags into the customer’s frames when they enter the service provider’s network, and then stripping the tags when the frames leave the network.
A service provider’s customers may have specific requirements for their internal VLAN IDs and number of VLANs supported.
VLAN ranges required by different customers in the same service-provider network might easily overlap, and traffic passing through the infrastructure might be mixed. Assigning a unique range of VLAN IDs to each customer would restrict customer
120
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
configurations, require intensive processing of VLAN mapping tables, and could easily exceed the maximum VLAN limit of
4096.
The Managed Switch supports multiple VLAN tags and can therefore be used in MAN applications as a provider bridge, aggregating traffic from numerous independent customer LANs into the MAN (Metro Access Network) space. One of the purposes of the provider bridge is to recognize and use VLAN tags so that the VLANs in the MAN space can be used independent of the customers’ VLANs. This is accomplished by adding a VLAN tag with a MAN-related VID for frames entering the MAN. When leaving the MAN, the tag is stripped and the original VLAN tag with the customer-related VID is again available.
This provides a tunneling mechanism to connect remote costumer VLANs through a common MAN space without interfering with the VLAN tags. All tags use EtherType 0x8100 or 0x88A8, where 0x8100 is used for customer tags and 0x88A8 are used for service provider tags.
In cases where a given service VLAN only has two member ports on the switch, the learning can be disabled for the particular
VLAN and can therefore rely on flooding as the forwarding mechanism between the two ports. This way, the MAC table requirements is reduced.
Edit Interface Setting
The Edit Interface Setting/Status screens in Figure 4-5-5 & Figure 4-5-6 appear.
Figure 4-5-5 Edit Interface Setting Page Screenshot
121
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port Select
Interface VLAN Mode
PVID
Accepted Type
Ingress Filtering
Buttons
Uplink
TPID
Description
Select port number from this drop-down list to set VLAN port setting.
Set the port in access, trunk, hybrid and tunnel mode.
Trunk means the port allows traffic of multiple VLANs.
Access indicates the port belongs to one VLAN only.
Hybrid means the port allows the traffic of multi-VLANs to pass in tag or untag mode.
Tunnel configures IEEE 802.1Q tunneling for a downlink port to another device within the customer network.
Allows you to assign PVID to selected port.
The PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port. The
PVID must be the same as the VLAN ID that the port belongs to VLAN group, or the untagged traffic will be dropped.
The range for the PVID is 1-4094.
Determines whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames. This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing. If the port only accepts tagged frames, untagged frames received on the port are discarded.
Options:
All
Tag Only
Untag Only
By default, the field is set to All.
If ingress filtering is enabled (checkbox is checked), frames classified to a
VLAN that the port is not a member of get discarded.
If ingress filtering is disabled, frames classified to a VLAN that the port is not a member of are accepted and forwarded to the switch engine.
However, the port will never transmit frames classified to VLANs that it is not a member of.
Enable/disable uplink function in trunk port.
Configure the type (TPID) of the protocol of switch trunk port.
: Click to apply changes.
122
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-5-6 Edit Interface Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
Interface VLAN Mode
PVID
Description
The switch port number of the logical port
Display the current interface VLAN mode
Display the current PVID
Accepted Frame Type Display the current access frame type
Ingress Filtering
Display the current ingress filtering
Uplink
Display the current uplink mode
TPID
Display the current TPID
123
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.5.6 Port to VLAN
Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected VLAN index. This page allows you to add and delete port members of each VLAN. The screen in Figure 4-5-7 appears.
Figure 4-5-7 Port to VLAN Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
VLAN ID
Port
Interface VLAN Mode
Membership
Description
Select VLAN ID from this drop-down list to assign VLAN membership.
The switch port number of the logical port.
Display the current interface VLAN mode.
Select VLAN membership for each interface by marking the appropriate radio button for a port or trunk:
Forbidden:
Interface is forbidden from automatically joining the VLAN via
GVRP.
Excluded:
Interface is not a member of the VLAN. Packets associated with this VLAN will not be transmitted by the interface.
Tagged:
Interface is a member of the VLAN. All packets transmitted by the port will be tagged, that is, carry a tag and therefore carry VLAN or
CoS information.
Untagged:
Interface is a member of the VLAN. All packets transmitted by the
124
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Buttons
PVID
: Click to apply changes. port will be untagged, that is, not carry a tag and therefore not carry VLAN or CoS information. Note that an interface must be assigned to at least one group as an untagged port.
Display the current PVID
4.5.7 Port VLAN Membership
This page provides an overview of membership status for VLAN users. The VLAN Membership Status screen in Figure 4-5-8 appears.
Figure 4-5-8 Port VLAN Membership Table Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
Operational VLANs
Modify
Description
The switch port number of the logical port
Mode
Display the current VLAN mode
Administrative VLANs
Display the current administrative VLANs
Display the current operational VLANs
Click to modify VLAN membership
125
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.5.8 Protocol VLAN Group Setting
The network devices required to support multiple protocols cannot be easily grouped into a common VLAN. This may require non-standard devices to pass traffic between different VLANs in order to encompass all the devices participating in a specific protocol. This kind of configuration deprives users of the basic benefits of VLANs, including security and easy accessibility.
To avoid these problems, you can configure this Managed Switch with protocol-based VLANs that divide the physical network into logical VLAN groups for each required protocol. When a frame is received at a port, its VLAN membership can then be determined based on the protocol type being used by the inbound packets.
Command Usage
To configure protocol-based VLANs, follow these steps: separate VLAN for each major protocol running on your network. Do not add port members at this time. page.
3. Then map the protocol for each interface to the appropriate VLAN using the Protocol VLAN Port Configuration page.
This page allows you to configure protocol-based VLAN Group Setting. The protocol-based VLAN screens in Figure 4-5-9 &
Figure 4-5-10 appear.
Figure 4-5-9 Add Protocol VLAN Group Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Group ID
Frame Type
Protocol Value
(0x0600-0xFFFE)
Description
Protocol Group ID assigned to the Special Protocol VLAN Group.
Frame Type can have one of the following values:
Ethernet II
IEEE802.3_LLC_Other
RFC_1042
Note:
On changing the Frame type field, valid value of the following text field will vary depending on the new frame type you selected.
Valid value that can be entered in this text field depends on the option selected from the preceding Frame Type selection menu.
126
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Valid values for frame type ranges from 0x0600-0xfffe
Figure 4-5-10 Protocol VLAN Group State Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Group ID
Frame Type
Protocol Value
Delete
Description
Display the current group ID
Display the current frame type
Display the current protocol value
Click to delete the group ID entry
127
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.5.9 Protocol VLAN Port Setting
This page allows you to map an already configured Group Name to a VLAN/port for the switch. The Protocol VLAN Port
Setting/State screens in Figure 4-5-11 & Figure 4-5-12 appear.
Figure 4-5-11 Protocol VLAN Port Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Buttons
Object
Port
Group
VLAN
Description
Select port from this drop-down list to assign protocol VLAN port
Select group ID from this drop-down list to protocol VLAN group
VLAN ID assigned to the Special Protocol VLAN Group
: Click to add protocol VLAN port entry.
Figure 4-5-12 Protocol VLAN Port State Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
Group ID
VLAN ID
Delete
Description
Display the current port
Display the current group ID
Display the current VLAN ID
Click to delete the group ID entry
128
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.5.10 GVRP Setting
GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register
VLAN members on ports across the network.
VLANs are dynamically configured based on join messages issued by host devices and propagated throughout the network.
GVRP must be enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration, and to support VLANs which extend beyond the local switch.
The GVRP Global Setting/Information screens in Figure 4-5-13 & Figure 4-5-14 appear.
Figure 4-5-13 GVRP Global Setting Page Screenshot
129
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Object
GVRP
Join Timeout
Leave Timeout
LeaveAll Timeout
Description
Controls whether GVRP is enabled or disabled on this switch.
The interval between transmitting requests/queries to participate in a VLAN group.
Range: 20-16375 centiseconds
Default: 20 centiseconds
The interval a port waits before leaving a VLAN group. This time should be set to more than twice the join time. This ensures that after a Leave or LeaveAll message has been issued, the applicants can rejoin before the port actually leaves the group.
Range: 45-32760 centiseconds
Default: 60 centiseconds
The interval between sending out a LeaveAll query message for VLAN group participants and the port leaving the group. This interval should be considerably larger than the Leave Time to minimize the amount of traffic generated by nodes rejoining the group.
Range: 65-32765 centiseconds;
Default: 1000 centiseconds
Timer settings must follow this rule:
2 x (join timer) < leave timer < leaveAll timer
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-5-14 GVRP Global Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
130
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Object
GVRP Status
Join Timeout
Leave Timeout
LeaveAll Timeout
Description
Display the current GVRP status
Display the current join timeout parameter
Display the current leave timeout parameter
Display the current leaveall timeout parameter
4.5.11 GVRP Port Setting
The GVRP Port Setting/Status screens in Figure 4-5-15 & Figure 4-5-16 appear.
Figure 4-5-15 GVRP Global Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port Select
GVRP Enabled
Registration Mode
VLAN Creation
Description
Select port from this drop-down list to assign protocol VLAN port
Controls whether GVRP is enabled or disabled on port
By default GVRP ports are in normal registration mode. These ports use GVRP join messages from neighboring switches to prune the VLANs running across the
802.1Q trunk link. If the device on the other side is not capable of sending GVRP messages, or if you do not want to allow the switch to prune any of the VLANs, use the fixed mode. Fixed mode ports will forward for all VLANs that exist in the switch database. Ports in forbidden mode forward only for VLAN 1.
GVRP can dynamically create VLANs on switches for trunking purposes. By enabling GVRP dynamic VLAN creation, a switch will add VLANs to its database when it receives GVRP join messages about VLANs it does not have.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
131
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-5-16 GVRP Port Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
Enable Status
Registration Mode
Description
The switch port number of the logical port
Display the current GVRP port state
Display the current registration mode
VLAN Creation Status Display the current VLAN creation status
4.5.12 GVRP VLAN
The GVRP VLAN Database screen in Figure 4-5-17 appears.
Figure 4-5-17 GVRP VLAN Database Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
VLAN ID
Member Ports
Dynamic Ports
VLAN Type
Description
Display the current VLAN ID
Display the current member ports
Display the current dynamic ports
Display the current VLAN type
132
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.5.13 GVRP Statistics
The GVRP Port Statistics and Error Statistics screens in Figure 4-5-18 & Figure 4-5-19 appear.
Figure 4-5-18 GVRP Port Statistics Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
Join Empty (Rx/Tx)
Empty (Rx/Tx)
Leave Empty (Rx/Tx)
Join In (Rx/Tx)
Leave In (Rx/Tx)
LeaveAll (Rx/Tx)
Description
The switch port number of the logical port
Display the current join empty (TX/RX) packets
Display the current empty (TX/RX) packets
Display the current leave empty (TX/RX) packets
Display the current join in (TX/RX) packets
Display the current leave in (TX/RX) packets
Display the current leaveall (TX/RX) packets
Figure 4-5-19 GVRP Port Error Statistics Page Screenshot
133
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Buttons
Object
Port
Invalid Protocol ID
Invalid Attribute Type
Description
The switch port number of the logical port.
Display the current invalid protocol ID
Display the current invalid attribute type
Invalid Attribute Value Display the current invalid attribute value
Invalid Attribute
Length
Invalid Event
Display the current invalid attribute length
Display the current invalid event.
: Click to clear the GVRP Error Statistics.
: Click to refresh the GVRP Error Statistics.
134
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.5.14 VLAN setting example:
- Separate VLANs
- 802.1Q VLAN Trunk
4.5.14.1 Two separate 802.1Q VLANs
The diagram shows how the Managed Switch handles Tagged and Untagged traffic flow for two VLANs. VLAN Group 2 and
VLAN Group 3 are separated VLANs. Each VLAN isolates network traffic so only members of the VLAN receive traffic from the same VLAN members. The screen in Figure 4-5-20 appears and Table 4-5-2 describes the port configuration of the Managed
Switches.
Figure 4-5-20 Two Separate VLAN Diagrams
VLAN Group
VLAN Group 1
VLAN Group 2
VLAN Group 3
VID
1
2
3
Untagged Members
Port-7~Port-8
Port-1,Port-2
Port-4,Port-5
Tagged Members
N/A
Port-3
Port-6
The scenario described as follows:
Untagged packet entering VLAN 2
Table 4-5-2 VLAN and Port Configuration
1.
While [PC-1] transmits an untagged packet enters Port-1, the Managed Switch will tag it with a VLAN Tag=2.
[PC-2] and [PC-3] will received the packet through Port-2 and Port-3.
2.
[PC-4], [PC-5] and [PC-6] received no packet.
135
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
3.
While the packet leaves Port-2, it will be stripped away its tag becoming an untagged packet.
4.
While the packet leaves Port-3, it will keep as a tagged packet with VLAN Tag=2.
Tagged packet entering VLAN 2
1.
While [PC-3] transmits a tagged packet with VLAN Tag=2 enters Port-3, [PC-1] and [PC-2] will receive the packet through Port-1 and Port-2.
2.
While the packet leaves Port-1 and Port-2, it will be stripped away its tag becoming an untagged packet.
Untagged packet entering VLAN 3
1.
While [PC-4] transmits an untagged packet enters Port-4, the switch will tag it with a VLAN Tag=3. [PC-5] and
[PC-6] will receive the packet through Port-5 and Port-6.
2.
While the packet leaves Port-5, it will be stripped away its tag becoming an untagged packet.
3.
While the packet leaves Port-6, it will keep as a tagged packet with VLAN Tag=3.
In this example, VLAN Group 1 is set as default VLAN, but only focuses on VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 traffic flow.
Setup Steps
1. Create VLAN Group 2 and 3
Add VLAN group 2 and group 3
2. Assign VLAN mode and PVID to each port:
Port-1,Port-2 and Port-3 : VLAN Mode = Hybrid, PVID=2
Port-4,Port-5 and Port-6 : VLAN Mode = Hybrid, PVID=3
136
3. Assign Tagged/Untagged to each port:
VLAN ID = 2:
Port-1 & 2 = Untagged,
Port-3 = Tagged,
Port -4~6 = Excluded.
VLAN ID = 3:
Port-4 & 5 = Untagged,
Port -6 = Tagged,
Port-1~3 = Excluded.
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
137
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.5.14.2 VLAN Trunking between two 802.1Q aware switches
In most cases, they are used for “Uplink” to other switches. VLANs are separated at different switches, but they need to access other switches within the same VLAN group. The screen in Figure 4-5-21 appears.
Setup steps
1. Create VLAN Group 2 and 3
Add VLAN group 2 and group 3
138
2. Assign VLAN mode and PVID to each port:
Port-1,Port-2 and Port-3 : VLAN Mode = Hybrid, PVID=2
Port-4,Port-5 and Port-6 : VLAN Mode = Hybrid, PVID=3
Port-7 : VLAN Mode = Hybrid, PVID=1
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
3. Assign Tagged/Untagged to each port:
VLAN ID = 1:
Port-1~6 = Untagged,
Port -7 = Excluded.
VLAN ID = 2:
Port-1 & 2 = Untagged,
Port-3 & 7 = Tagged,
Port -4~6 = Excluded.
139
VLAN ID = 3:
Port-4 & 5 = Untagged,
Port -6 & 7= Tagged,
Port-1~3 = Excluded.
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
140
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.6 Spanning Tree Protocol
4.6.1 Theory
The Spanning Tree Protocol can be used to detect and disable network loops, and to provide backup links between switches, bridges or routers. This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network, and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down. The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions:
STP – Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D)
RSTP – Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1w)
MSTP – Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1s)
The IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol and IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol allow for the blocking of links between switches that form loops within the network. When multiple links between switches are detected, a primary link is established. Duplicated links are blocked from use and become standby links. The protocol allows for the duplicate links to be used in the event of a failure of the primary link. Once the Spanning Tree Protocol is configured and enabled, primary links are established and duplicated links are blocked automatically. The reactivation of the blocked links (at the time of a primary link failure) is also accomplished automatically without operator intervention.
This automatic network reconfiguration provides maximum uptime to network users. However, the concepts of the Spanning
Tree Algorithm and protocol are a complicated and complex subject and must be fully researched and understood. It is possible to cause serious degradation of the performance of the network if the Spanning Tree is incorrectly configured. Please read the following before making any changes from the default values.
The Switch STP performs the following functions:
Creates a single spanning tree from any combination of switching or bridging elements.
Creates multiple spanning trees – from any combination of ports contained within a single switch, in user specified groups.
Automatically reconfigures the spanning tree to compensate for the failure, addition, or removal of any element in the tree.
Reconfigures the spanning tree without operator intervention.
Bridge Protocol Data Units
For STP to arrive at a stable network topology, the following information is used:
The unique switch identifier
The path cost to the root associated with each switch port
The port identifier
STP communicates between switches on the network using Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs). Each BPDU contains the following information:
The unique identifier of the switch that the transmitting switch currently believes is the root switch
The path cost to the root from the transmitting port
141
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The port identifier of the transmitting port
The switch sends BPDUs to communicate and construct the spanning-tree topology. All switches connected to the LAN on which the packet is transmitted will receive the BPDU. BPDUs are not directly forwarded by the switch, but the receiving switch uses the information in the frame to calculate a BPDU, and, if the topology changes, initiates a BPDU transmission.
The communication between switches via BPDUs results in the following:
One switch is elected as the root switch
The shortest distance to the root switch is calculated for each switch
A designated switch is selected. This is the switch closest to the root switch through which packets will be forwarded to the root.
A port for each switch is selected. This is the port providing the best path from the switch to the root switch.
Ports included in the STP are selected.
Creating a Stable STP Topology
It is to make the root port a fastest link. If all switches have STP enabled with default settings, the switch with the lowest MAC address in the network will become the root switch. By increasing the priority (lowering the priority number) of the best switch,
STP can be forced to select the best switch as the root switch.
When STP is enabled using the default parameters, the path between source and destination stations in a switched network might not be ideal. For instance, connecting higher-speed links to a port that has a higher number than the current root port can cause a root-port change.
STP Port States
The BPDUs take some time to pass through a network. This propagation delay can result in topology changes where a port that transitioned directly from a Blocking state to a Forwarding state could create temporary data loops. Ports must wait for new network topology information to propagate throughout the network before starting to forward packets. They must also wait for the packet lifetime to expire for BPDU packets that were forwarded based on the old topology. The forward delay timer is used to allow the network topology to stabilize after a topology change. In addition, STP specifies a series of states a port must transition through to further ensure that a stable network topology is created after a topology change.
Each port on a switch using STP exists is in one of the following five states:
Blocking – the port is blocked from forwarding or receiving packets
Listening – the port is waiting to receive BPDU packets that may tell the port to go back to the blocking state
Learning – the port is adding addresses to its forwarding database, but not yet forwarding packets
Forwarding – the port is forwarding packets
Disabled – the port only responds to network management messages and must return to the blocking state first
A port transitions from one state to another as follows:
From initialization (switch boot) to blocking
From blocking to listening or to disabled
From listening to learning or to disabled
From learning to forwarding or to disabled
From forwarding to disabled
142
From disabled to blocking
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-6-1 STP Port State Transitions
You can modify each port state by using management software. When you enable STP, every port on every switch in the network goes through the blocking state and then transitions through the states of listening and learning at power up. If properly configured, each port stabilizes to the forwarding or blocking state. No packets (except BPDUs) are forwarded from, or received by, STP enabled ports until the forwarding state is enabled for that port.
2. STP Parameters
STP Operation Levels
The Switch allows for two levels of operation: the switch level and the port level. The switch level forms a spanning tree consisting of links between one or more switches. The port level constructs a spanning tree consisting of groups of one or more ports. The STP operates in much the same way for both levels.
On the switch level, STP calculates the Bridge Identifier for each switch and then sets the Root
Bridge and the Designated Bridges. On the port level, STP sets the Root Port and the Designated
Ports.
The following are the user-configurable STP parameters for the switch level:
Parameter
Bridge Identifier(Not user configurable
Description
A combination of the User-set priority and the switch’s MAC address.
Default Value
32768 + MAC
143
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
except by setting priority below)
Priority
Hello Time
Maximum Age Timer
The Bridge Identifier consists of two parts: a 16-bit priority and a 48-bit Ethernet MAC address 32768 + MAC
A relative priority for each switch – lower numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given switch being elected as the root bridge
32768
The length of time between broadcasts of the hello message by the switch
Measures the age of a received BPDU for a port and ensures that the BPDU is discarded when its age exceeds the value of the maximum age timer.
2 seconds
20 seconds
Forward Delay Timer
The amount time spent by a port in the learning and listening states waiting for a
BPDU that may return the port to the blocking state.
The following are the user-configurable STP parameters for the port or port group level:
15 seconds
Variable Description
Port Priority
A relative priority for each port –lower numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given port being elected as the root port
Port Cost
A value used by STP to evaluate paths –
STP calculates path costs and selects the path with the minimum cost as the active path
Default Value
128
200,000-100Mbps Fast Ethernet ports
20,000-1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet ports
0 - Auto
Default Spanning-Tree Configuration
Feature
Enable state
Port priority
Port cost
Bridge Priority
Default Value
STP disabled for all ports
128
0
32,768
User-Changeable STA Parameters
The Switch’s factory default setting should cover the majority of installations. However, it is advisable to keep the default settings as set at the factory; unless, it is absolutely necessary. The user changeable parameters in the Switch are as follows:
Priority – A Priority for the switch can be set from 0 to 65535. 0 is equal to the highest Priority.
144
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Hello Time – The Hello Time can be from 1 to 10 seconds. This is the interval between two transmissions of BPDU packets sent by the Root Bridge to tell all other Switches that it is indeed the Root Bridge. If you set a Hello Time for your Switch, and it is not the Root Bridge, the set Hello Time will be used if and when your Switch becomes the Root Bridge.
The Hello Time cannot be longer than the Max. Age. Otherwise, a configuration error will occur.
Max. Age – The Max Age can be from 6 to 40 seconds. At the end of the Max Age, if a BPDU has still not been received from the Root Bridge, your Switch will start sending its own BPDU to all other Switches for permission to become the Root Bridge. If it turns out that your Switch has the lowest Bridge Identifier, it will become the Root Bridge.
Forward Delay Timer – The Forward Delay can be from 4 to 30 seconds. This is the time any port on the
Switch spends in the listening state while moving from the blocking state to the forwarding state.
Observe the following formulas when setting the above parameters:
Max. Age _ 2 x (Forward Delay - 1 second)
Max. Age _ 2 x (Hello Time + 1 second)
Port Priority – A Port Priority can be from 0 to 240. The lower the number, the greater the probability the port will be chosen as the Root Port.
Port Cost – A Port Cost can be set from 0 to 200000000. The lower the number, the greater the probability the port will be chosen to forward packets.
3. Illustration of STP
A simple illustration of three switches connected in a loop is depicted in the below diagram. In this example, you can anticipate some major network problems if the STP assistance is not applied.
If switch A broadcasts a packet to switch B, switch B will broadcast it to switch C, and switch C will broadcast it to back to switch
A and so on. The broadcast packet will be passed indefinitely in a loop, potentially causing a network failure. In this example,
STP breaks the loop by blocking the connection between switch B and C. The decision to block a particular connection is based on the STP calculation of the most current Bridge and Port settings.
Now, if switch A broadcasts a packet to switch C, then switch C will drop the packet at port 2 and the broadcast will end there.
Setting-up STP using values other than the defaults, can be complex. Therefore, you are advised to keep the default factory settings and STP will automatically assign root bridges/ports and block loop connections. Influencing STP to choose a particular switch as the root bridge using the Priority setting, or influencing STP to choose a particular port to block using the Port Priority and Port Cost settings is, however, relatively straight forward.
145
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-6-2 Before Applying the STA Rules
In this example, only the default STP values are used.
Figure 4-6-3 After Applying the STA Rules
146
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The switch with the lowest Bridge ID (switch C) was elected the root bridge, and the ports were selected to give a high port cost between switches B and C. The two (optional) Gigabit ports (default port cost = 20,000) on switch A are connected to one
(optional) Gigabit port on both switch B and C. The redundant link between switch B and C is deliberately chosen as a 100 Mbps
Fast Ethernet link (default port cost = 200,000). Gigabit ports could be used, but the port cost should be increased from the default to ensure that the link between switch B and switch C is the blocked link.
This section has the following items:
STP Global Setting
STP Port Setting
CIST Instance Setting
CIST Port Setting
MST Instance Setting
MST Port Setting
STP Statistics
Configures STP system settings
Configuration per port STP setting
Configure system configuration
Configure CIST port setting
Configuration each MST instance setting
Configuration per port MST setting
Display the STP statistics
147
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.6.2 STP Global Settings
This page allows you to configure STP system settings. The settings are used by all STP Bridge instances in the Switch. The
Managed Switch support the following Spanning Tree protocols:
‧
Compatiable -- Spanning Tree Protocol (STP):Provides a single path between end stations, avoiding and eliminating loops.
‧
Normal -- Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP): Detects and uses of network topologies that provide faster spanning tree convergence, without creating forwarding loops.
‧
Extension – Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP): Defines an extension to RSTP to further develop the usefulness of virtual LANs (VLANs). This "Per-VLAN" Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol configures a separate
Spanning Tree for each VLAN group and blocks all but one of the possible alternate paths within each Spanning
Tree.
The STP Global Settings screens in Figure 4-6-4 & Figure 4-6-5 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-6-4 Global Settings Page Screenshot
Object
Enable
BPDU Forward
PathCost Method
Force Version
Description
Enable or disable the STP function.
The default value is "Disabled".
Set the BPDU forward method.
The path cost method is used to determine the best path between devices.
Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower media.
The STP protocol version setting. Valid values are STP-Compatible,
148
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Buttons
RSTP-Operation and MSTP-Operation.
Configuration Name
Identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used.
Configuration Revision
Identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used.
The values allowed are between 0 and 65535.
The default value is 0.
: Click to apply changes.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-6-5 STP Information Page Screenshot
Object
STP
BPDU Forward
Cost Method
Description
Display the current STP state
Display the current BPDU forward mode
Display the current cost method
Force Version
Configuration Name
Display the current force version
Display the current configuration name
Configuration Revision
Display the current configuration revision
149
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.6.3 STP Port Setting
This page allows you to configure per port STP settings. The STP Port Setting screens in Figure 4-6-6 & Figure 4-6-7 appear.
Figure 4-6-6 STP Port Configuration Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port Select
External Cost (0 =
Auto)
Edge Port
P2P MAC
Migrate
BPDU Filter
BPDU Guard
Description
Select port number from this drop-down list.
Controls the path cost incurred by the port.
The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed, using the 802.1D recommended values. Using the Specific setting, a user-defined value can be entered.
The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network.
Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports. Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000.
Controls whether the operEdge flag should start as being set or cleared. (The initial operEdge state when a port is initialized).
Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will transmit and receive
BPDUs.
Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will disable itself upon reception of a BPDU.
The port will enter the error-disabled state, and will be removed from the active topology.
Controls whether the port connects to a point-to-point LAN rather than a shared medium.
This can be automatically determined, or forced either true or false. Transition to the forwarding state is faster for point-to-point LANs than for shared media.
(This applies to physical ports only. Aggregations are always forced Point2Point).
If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs, including Configuration or
Topology Change Notification BPDUs, it will automatically set the selected interface to forced STP-compatible mode.
However, you can also use the Protocol Migration button to manually re-check
150
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
the appropriate BPDU format (RSTP or STP-compatible) to send on the selected interfaces.
(Default: Disabled)
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
By default, the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port, and configures the path cost according to the values shown below. Path cost “0” is used to indicate auto-configuration mode. When the short path cost method is selected and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 8021w standard exceeds 65,535, the default is set to
65,535.
Port Type
Ethernet
IEEE 802.1D-1998
50-600
Fast Ethernet
10-60
Gigabit Ethernet
3-10
IEEE 802.1w-2001
200,000-20,000,000
20,000-2,000,000
2,000-200,000
Table 4-6-1 Recommended STP Path Cost Range
Port Type
Ethernet
Fast Ethernet
Gigabit Ethernet
Link Type
Half Duplex
Full Duplex
Trunk
Half Duplex
Full Duplex
Trunk
Full Duplex
Trunk
IEEE 802.1D-1998
100
95
90
19
18
15
4
3
Table 4-6-2 Recommended STP Path Costs
IEEE 802.1w-2001
2,000,000
1,999,999
1,000,000
200,000
100,000
50,000
10,000
5,000
Port Type
Ethernet
Fast Ethernet
Gigabit Ethernet
Link Type
Half Duplex
Full Duplex
Trunk
Half Duplex
Full Duplex
Trunk
Full Duplex
Trunk
IEEE 802.1w-2001
2,000,000
1,000,000
500,000
200,000
100,000
50,000
10,000
5,000
Table 4-6-3 Default STP Path Costs
151
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-6-7 STP Port Status Page Screenshot
Object
Port
Admin Enable
External Cost
Edge Port
BPDU Filter
BPDU Guard
P2P MAC
Description
The switch port number of the logical STP port.
Display the current STP port mode status
Display the current external cost.
Display the current edge port status.
Display the current BPDU filter configuration.
Display the current BPDU guard configuration.
Display the current P2P MAC status.
152
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.6.4 CIST Instance Setting
This Page allows you to configure CIST instance settings. The CIST Instance Setting and Information screens in Figure 4-6-8 &
Figure 4-6-9 appear.
Figure 4-6-8: CIST Instance Setting Page Screenshot
The Page includes the following fields:
Object
priority
Max Hops
Forward Delay
Max Age
Description
Controls the bridge priority. Lower numeric values have better priority. The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number, concatenated with the 6-byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier.
For MSTP operation, this is the priority of the CIST. Otherwise, this is the priority of the STP/RSTP bridge.
This defines the initial value of remaining Hops for MSTI information generated at the boundary of an MSTI region. It defines how many bridges a root bridge can distribute its BPDU information. Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 hops.
The delay used by STP Bridges to transition Root and Designated Ports to
Forwarding (used in STP compatible mode). Valid values are in the range 4 to 30 seconds
-Default: 15
-Minimum: The higher of 4 or [(Max. Message Age / 2) + 1]
-Maximum: 30
The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the
Root Bridge. Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 seconds.
-Default: 20
-Minimum: The higher of 6 or [2 x (Hello Time + 1)].
-Maximum: The lower of 40 or [2 x (Forward Delay -1)]
153
Tx Hold Count
Hello Time
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The number of BPDU's a bridge port can send per second.
When exceeded, transmission of the next BPDU will be delayed. Valid values are in the range 1 to 10 BPDU's per second.
The time that controls the switch to send out the BPDU packet to check STP current status.
Enter a value between 1 through 10.
Figure 4-6-9 CIST Instance Information Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Priority
Max Hop
Forward Delay
Max. Age
Tx Hold Count
Hello Time
Description
Display the current CIST priority
Display the current Max. hop
Display the current forward delay
Display the current Max. Age
Display the current Tx hold count
Display the current hello time
154
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.6.5 CIST Port Setting
This page allows you to configure per port CIST priority and cost. The CIST Port Setting and Status screens in Figure 4-6-10 &
Figure 4-6-11 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-6-10 CIST Port Setting Page Screenshot
Object
Port Select
Priority
Internal Path Cost
(0 = Auto)
Description
Select port number from this drop-down list.
Controls the port priority. This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost. (See above).
Default: 128
Range: 0-240, in steps of 16
Controls the path cost incurred by the port.
The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed, using the 802.1D recommended values. Using the Specific setting, a user-defined value can be entered.
The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network.
Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports. Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
155
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-6-11 CIST Port Status Page Screenshot
Object
Port
Description
The switch port number of the logical STP port
Identifier (Priority /
Port ID)
External Path Cost
Conf/Oper
Internal Path Cost
Conf/Oper
Designated Root
Bridge
External Root Cost
Display the current identifier (Priority / Port ID)
Display the current external path cost conf/oper
Display the current internal path cost/oper
Display the current designated root bridge
Display the current external root cost
Regional Root Bridge
Display the current regional root bridge
Internal Root Cost
Designated Bridge
Display the current internal root cost
Display the current designated bridge
Internal Port Path Cost
Display the current internal port path cost
Edge Port Conf/Oper
P2P MAC Conf/Oper
Port Role
Port State
Display the current edge port conf/oper
Display the current P2P MAC conf/oper
Display the current port role
Display the current port state
156
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.6.6 MST Instance Configuration
This page allows the user to configure MST Instance Configuration. The MST Instance Setting, Information and Status screens in Figure 4-6-12 , Figure 4-6-13 & Figure 4-6-14 appear.
Figure 4-6-12 MST Instance Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
MSTI ID
VLAN List (1-4096)
Priority
Description
Allow to assign MSTI ID.
The range for the MSTI ID is 1-15.
Allow to assign VLAN list to special MSTI ID.
The range for the VLAN list is 1-4094.
Controls the bridge priority. Lower numerical values have better priority.
The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number, concatenated with the 6-byte
MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-6-13 MSTI Instance Setting Information Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
MSTI
Status
Description
Display the current MSTI entry
Display the current MSTI status
157
VLAN List
VLAN Count
Priority
Display the current VLAN list
Display the current VLAN count
Display the current MSTI priority
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-6-14 MST Instance Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
MSTI ID
Description
Display the MSTI ID.
Regional Root Bridge
Display the current designated root bridge
Internal Root Cost
Designated Bridge
Display the current internal root cost
Display the current designated bridge
Root Port
Max Age
Forward Delay
Display the current root port.
Display the current max. age.
Display the current forward delay.
Remaining Hops
Display the current remaining hops.
Last Topology Change
Display the current last topology change.
158
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.6.7 MST Port Setting
This page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI port configurations, and possibly change them as well.
A MSTI port is a virtual port, which is instantiated separately for each active CIST (physical) port for each MSTI instance configured and applicable for the port. The MSTI instance must be selected before displaying actual MSTI port configuration options.
This page contains MSTI port settings for physical and aggregated ports. The aggregation settings are global. The MSTI Ports
Setting screens in Figure 4-6-15 & Figure 4-6-16 appear.
Figure 4-6-15 MST Port Configuration Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Buttons
Object
MST ID
Description
Enter the special MST ID to configure path cost & priority.
Port Select
Select port number from this drop-down list.
Priority
Controls the port priority. This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost.
Controls the path cost incurred by the port.
Internal Path Cost (0 =
Auto)
The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed, using the 802.1D recommended values. Using the Specific setting, a user-defined value can be entered.
The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network.
Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports.
Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000.
: Click to apply changes.
159
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-6-16 MST Port Status Page Screenshot
Object
MSTI ID
Description
Display the current MSTI ID
Port
Internal Root Cost
The switch port number of the logical STP port
Identifier (Priority /
Port ID)
Internal Path Cost
Conf/Oper
Display the current identifier (priority / port ID)
Display the current internal path cost configuration / operation
Regional Root Bridge Display the current regional root bridget
Display the current internal root cost
Display the current designated bridge Designated Bridge
Internal Path Cost
Port Role
Display the current internal path cost
Display the current port role
Port State
Display the current port state
160
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.6.8 STP Statistics
This page displays STP statistics. The STP statistics screen in Figure 4-6-17 appears.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-6-17 STP Statistics Page Screenshot
Object
Port
Description
The switch port number of the logical STP port
Configuration BPDUs Received
Display the current configuration BPDUs received
TCN BPDUs Received
Display the current TCN BPDUs received
Display the current MSTP BPDUs received MSTP BPDUs Received
Configuration BPDUs
Transmitted
TCN BPDUs Transmitted
MSTP BPDUs Transmitted
Display the configuration BPDUs transmitted
Display the current TCN BPDUs transmitted
Display the current BPDUs transmitted
161
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.7 Multicast
This section has the following items:
Properties
IGMP Snooping
MLD Snooping Statistics
Multicast Throttling
Configures multicast properties
Configures IGMP snooping settings
IGMP Snooping Statistics
Display the IGMP snooping statistics
MLD Snooping
Configures MLD snooping settings
Display the MLD snooping statistics
Configures multicast throttling setting
Setting
Multicast Filter
Configures multicast filter
4.7.1 Properties
This page provides multicast properties related configuration.
The multicast Properties and Information screen in Figure 4-7-1 & Figure 4-7-2 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-7-1 Properties Setting Page Screenshot
Object
Unknown Multicast
Buttons
Action
IPv4 Forward Method
IPv6 Forward Method
Description
Unknown multicast traffic method:
Drop, flood or send to router port.
Configure the IPv4 multicast forward method
Configure the IPv6 multicast forward method
: Click to apply changes.
162
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-7-2 Properties Information Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Unknown Multicast
Action
Description
Display the current unknown multicast action status
Forward Method For IPv4
Display the current IPv4 multicast forward method
Forward Method For IPv6
Display the current IPv6 multicast forward method
4.7.2 IGMP Snooping
The Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) lets host and routers share information about multicast groups memberships. IGMP snooping is a switch feature that monitors the exchange of IGMP messages and copies them to the CPU for feature processing. The overall purpose of IGMP Snooping is to limit the forwarding of multicast frames to only ports that are a member of the multicast group.
About the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Snooping
Computers and network devices that want to receive multicast transmissions need to inform nearby routers that they will become members of a multicast group. The Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) is used to communicate this information. IGMP is also used to periodically check the multicast group for members that are no longer active. In the case where there is more than one multicast router on a sub network, one router is elected as the ‘queried’. This router then keeps track of the membership of the multicast groups that have active members. The information received from IGMP is then used to determine if multicast packets should be forwarded to a given sub network or not. The router can check, using IGMP, to see if there is at least one member of a multicast group on a given subnet work. If there are no members on a sub network, packets will not be forwarded to that sub network.
163
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-7-3 Multicast Service
Figure 4-7-4 Multicast Flooding
164
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-7-5 IGMP Snooping Multicast Stream Control
IGMP Versions 1 and 2
Multicast groups allow members to join or leave at any time. IGMP provides the method for members and multicast routers to communicate when joining or leaving a multicast group.
IGMP version 1 is defined in RFC 1112. It has a fixed packet size and no optional data.
The format of an IGMP packet is shown below:
IGMP Message Format
Octets
0 8 16 31
Checksum
Group Address (all zeros if this is a query)
The IGMP Type codes are shown below:
Type Meaning
0x11 Membership Query (if Group Address is 0.0.0.0)
0x11
Specific Group Membership Query (if Group Address is
Present)
165
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
0x16
0x17
0x12
Membership Report (version 2)
Leave a Group (version 2)
Membership Report (version 1)
IGMP packets enable multicast routers to keep track of the membership of multicast groups, on their respective sub networks.
The following outlines what is communicated between a multicast router and a multicast group member using IGMP.
A host sends an IGMP “report” to join a group
A host will never send a report when it wants to leave a group (for version 1).
A host will send a “leave” report when it wants to leave a group (for version 2).
Multicast routers send IGMP queries (to the all-hosts group address: 224.0.0.1) periodically to see whether any group members exist on their sub networks. If there is no response from a particular group, the router assumes that there are no group members on the network.
The Time-to-Live (TTL) field of query messages is set to 1 so that the queries will not be forwarded to other sub networks.
IGMP version 2 introduces some enhancements such as a method to elect a multicast queried for each LAN, an explicit leave message, and query messages that are specific to a given group.
The states a computer will go through to join or to leave a multicast group are shown below:
Figure 4-7-6 IGMP State Transitions
166
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
IGMP Querier –
A router, or multicast-enabled switch, can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic. If there is more than one router/switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting, one of these devices is elected “querier” and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members. It then propagates the service requests on to any upstream multicast switch/router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service.
Multicast routers use this information, along with a multicast routing protocol such as
DVMRP or PIM, to support IP multicasting across the Internet.
4.7.2.1 IGMP Setting
This page provides IGMP Snooping related configuration.
Most of the settings are global, whereas the Router Port configuration is related to the current unit, as reflected by the page header. The IGMP Snooping Setting and Information screens in Figure 4-7-7 , Figure 4-7-8 & Figure 4-7-9 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-7-7 IGMP Snooping Page Screenshot
Object
IGMP Snooping Status
IGMP Snooping Version
IGMP Snooping Report
Suppression
Description
Enable or disable the IGMP snooping. The default value is "Disabled".
Sets the IGMP Snooping operation version. Possible versions are:
v2: Set IGMP Snooping supported IGMP version 2.
v3: Set IGMP Snooping supported IGMP version 3.
Limits the membership report traffic sent to multicast-capable routers.
When you disable report suppression, all IGMP reports are sent as is to multicast-capable routers.
The default is enabled.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
167
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-7-8 IGMP Snooping Information Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
IGMP Snooping Status
IGMP Snooping Version
IGMP Snooping V2 Report
Suppression
Description
Display the current IGMP snooping status.
Display the current IGMP snooping version.
Display the current IGMP snooping v2 report suppression.
Figure 4-7-9 IGMP Snooping Information Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Entry No.
VLAN ID
IGMP Snooping Operation
Status
Router Ports Auto Learn
Description
Display the current entry number
Display the current VLAN ID
Display the current IGMP snooping operation status
Display the current router ports auto learning
Query Robustness
Query Interval (sec.)
Query Max Response
Interval (sec.)
Display the current query robustness
Display the current query interval
Display the current query max response interval
Last Member Query count
Display the current last member query count
168
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Last Member Query
Interval (sec)
Immediate Leave
Modify
Display the current last member query interval
Display the current immediate leave
Click to edit parameter
4.7.2.2 IGMP Querier Setting
This page provides IGMP Querier Setting. The IGMP Querier Setting screens in Figure 4-7-10 & Figure 4-7-11 appear.
Figure 4-7-10 IGMP VLAN Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
VLAN ID
Querier State
Querier Version
Description
Select VLAN ID from this drop-down list.
Enable or disable the querier state.
The default value is "Disabled".
Sets the querier version for compatibility with other devices on the network.
Version: 2 or 3;
Default: 2
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-7-11 IGMP Querier Status Page Screenshot
169
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Object
VLAN ID
Querier State
Querier Status
Querier Version
Querier IP
4.7.2.3 IGMP Static Group
Description
Display the current VLAN ID
Display the current querier state
Display the current querier status
Display the current querier version
Display the current querier IP
Multicast filtering can be dynamically configured using IGMP Snooping and IGMP Query messages as described in above sections. For certain applications that require tighter control, you may need to statically configure a multicast service on the
Managed Switch. First add all the ports attached to participating hosts to a common VLAN, and then assign the multicast service to that VLAN group.
- Static multicast addresses are never aged out.
- When a multicast address is assigned to an interface in a specific VLAN, the corresponding traffic can only be forwarded to ports within that VLAN.
The IGMP Static Group configuration screens in Figure 4-7-12 & Figure 4-7-13 appear.
Figure 4-7-12 Add IGMP Static Group Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Description
Select VLAN ID from this drop-down list
The IP address for a specific multicast service
Select port number from this drop-down list
Buttons
Object
VLAN ID
Group IP Address
Member Ports
170
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
: Click to add IGMP router port entry.
Figure 4-7-13 IGMP Static Groups Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
VLAN ID
Group IP Address
Member Ports
Modify
Description
Display the current VLAN ID
Display the current group IP address
Display the current member ports
Click to edit parameter
4.7.2.4 IGMP Group Table
This page provides Multicast Database. The IGMP Group Table screen in Figure 4-7-14 appears.
Figure 4-7-14 IGMP Group Table Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
VLAN ID
Group IP Address
Member Port
Type
Life(Sec)
Description
Display the current VID
Display multicast IP address for a specific multicast service
Display the current member port
Member types displayed include Static or Dynamic, depending on selected options
Display the current life
171
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.7.2.5 IGMP Router Setting
Depending on your network connections, IGMP snooping may not always be able to locate the IGMP querier. Therefore, if the
IGMP querier is a known multicast router/ switch connected over the network to an interface (port or trunk) on your Managed
Switch, you can manually configure the interface (and a specified VLAN) to join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached router. This can ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all the appropriate interfaces within the Managed Switch.
The IGMP Router Setting and Status screens in Figure 4-7-15 & Figure 4-7-16 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-7-15 Add Router Port Page Screenshot
Object
VLAN ID
Type
Static Ports Select
Description
Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast router.
Sets the Router port type. The types of Router port as below:
Static
Forbid
Specify which ports act as router ports. A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier.
Specify which ports un-act as router ports
Buttons
Forbid Port Select
: Click to add IGMP router port entry.
Figure 4-7-16 Router Port Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
172
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Object
VLAN ID
Static Ports
Forbidden Ports
Modify
Description
Display the current VLAN ID
Display the current static ports
Display the current forbidden ports
Click
Click
to edit parameter
to delete the group ID entry
4.7.2.6 IGMP Router Table
This page provides Router Table. The Dynamic, Static and Forbidden Router Table screens in Figure 4-7-17 , Figure 4-7-18 &
Figure 4-7-19 appear.
Figure 4-7-17 Dynamic Router Table Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
VLAN ID
Port
Expiry Time (Sec)
Description
Display the current VLAN ID
Display the current dynamic router ports
Display the current expiry time
Figure 4-7-18 Static Router Table Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
VLAN ID
Port Mask
Description
Display the current VLAN ID
Display the current port mask
173
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-7-19 Forbidden Router Table Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
VLAN ID
Port Mask
Description
Display the current VLAN ID
Display the current port mask
4.7.2.7 IGMP Forward All
This page provides IGMP Forward All. The Forward All screen in Figure 4-7-20 appears.
Figure 4-7-20 Forward All Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
VLAN ID
Description
Select VLAN ID from this drop-down list to assign IGMP membership
174
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Port
Membership
The switch port number of the logical port
Select IGMP membership for each interface:
Forbidden:
Interface is forbidden from automatically joining the IGMP via MVR.
None:
Static:
Interface is not a member of the VLAN. Packets associated with this
VLAN will not be transmitted by the interface.
Interface is a member of the IGMP.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
4.7.3 IGMP Snooping Statics
This page provides IGMP Snooping Statics. The IGMP Snooping Statics screen in Figure 4-7-20 appears.
Figure 4-7-20 Forward All Setting Page Screenshot
175
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Total RX
Valid RX
Invalid RX
Other RX
Leave RX
Report RX
General Query RX
Special Group Query
RX
Special Group &
Source Query RX
Leave TX
Report TX
General Query TX
Buttons
Special Group Query
TX
Special Group &
Source Query TX
Description
Display current total RX
Display current valid RX
Display current invalid RX
Display current other RX
Display current leave RX
Display current report RX
Display current general query RX
Display current special group query RX
Display current special group & source query RX
Display current leave TX
Display current report TX
Display current general query TX
Display current special group query TX
Display current special group & source query TX
: Click to clear the IGMP Snooping Statistics.
: Click to refresh the IGMP Snooping Statistics.
176
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.7.4 MLD Snooping
4.7.4.1 MLD Setting
This page provides MLD Snooping related configuration.
Most of the settings are global, whereas the Router Port configuration is related to the current unit, as reflected by the page header. The MLD Snooping Setting, Information and Table screens in Figure 4-7-21 , Figure 4-7-22 & Figure 4-7-23 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-7-21 MLD Snooping Page Screenshot
Object
MLD Snooping Status
MLD Snooping Version
MLD Snooping Report
Suppression
Description
Enable or disable the MLD snooping. The default value is "Disabled".
Sets the MLD Snooping operation version. Possible versions are:
v1: Set MLD Snooping supported MLD version 1.
v2: Set MLD Snooping supported MLD version 2.
Limits the membership report traffic sent to multicast-capable routers. When you disable report suppression, all MLD reports are sent as is to multicast-capable routers. The default is enabled.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-7-22 MLD Snooping information Page Screenshot
177
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Object
MLD Snooping Status
MLD Snooping Version
MLD Snooping Report
Suppression
Description
Display the current MLD snooping status
Display the current MLD snooping version
Display the current MLD snooping report suppression
Figure 4-7-23 MLD Snooping Table Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Entry No.
VLAN ID
Description
Display the current entry number
Display the current VLAN ID
MLD Snooping Operation
Status
Display the current MLD snooping operation status
Router Ports Auto Learn Display the current router ports auto learning
Query Robustness
Query Interval (sec.)
Display the current query robustness
Display the current query interval
Query Max Response
Interval (sec.)
Display the current query max response interval
Last Member Query count
Display the current last member query count
Last Member Query
Interval (sec)
Immediate Leave
Modify
Display the current last member query interval
Display the current immediate leave
Click to edit parameter
178
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.7.4.2 MLD Static Group
The MLD Static Group configuration screens in Figure 4-7-24 & Figure 4-7-25 appear.
Figure 4-7-24 Add MLD Static Group Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Buttons
Object
VLAN ID
Group IP Address
Member Ports
Description
Select VLAN ID from this drop-down list
The IP address for a specific multicast service
Select port number from this drop-down list
: Click to add IGMP router port entry.
Figure 4-7-25 MLD Static Groups Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
VLAN ID
Group IPv6 Address
Member Ports
Modify
Description
Display the current VLAN ID
Display the current group IPv6 address
Display the current member ports
Click to edit parameter.
179
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.7.4.3 MLD Group Table
This page provides MLD Group Table. The MLD Group Table screen in Figure 4-7-26 appears.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-7-26 MLD Group Table Page Screenshot
Object
VLAN ID
Group IP Address
Member Port
Type
Life(Sec)
4.7.4.4 MLD Router Setting
Description
Display the current VID
Display multicast IP address for a specific multicast service
Display the current member port
Member types displayed include Static or Dynamic, depending on selected options
Display the current life
Depending on your network connections, MLD snooping may not always be able to locate the MLD querier. Therefore, if the
MLD querier is a known multicast router/ switch connected over the network to an interface (port or trunk) on your Managed
Switch, you can manually configure the interface (and a specified VLAN) to join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached router. This can ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all the appropriate interfaces within the Managed Switch.
The MLD Router Setting screens in Figure 4-7-27 & Figure 4-7-28 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-7-27 Add Router Port Page Screenshot
Object
VLAN ID
Description
Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached
180
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Type
Static Ports Select multicast router
Sets the Router port type. The types of Router port as below:
Static
Forbid
Specify which ports act as router ports. A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier.
Specify which ports un-act as router ports
Buttons
Forbid Port Select
: Click to add MLD router port entry.
Figure 4-7-28 Router Port Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
VLAN ID
Static Ports
Forbidden Ports
Modify
Description
Display the current VLAN ID
Display the current static ports
Display the current forbidden ports
Click to edit parameter
Click to delete the group ID entry
181
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.7.4.5 MLD Router Table
This page provides Router Table. The Dynamic, Static and Forbidden Router Table screens in Figure 4-7-29 , Figure 4-7-30 &
Figure 4-7-31 appear.
Figure 4-7-29 Dynamic Router Table Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
VLAN ID
Port
Expiry Time (Sec)
Description
Display the current VLAN ID
Display the current dynamic router ports
Display the current expiry time
Figure 4-7-30 Static Router Table Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
VLAN ID
Port Mask
Description
Display the current VLAN ID
Display the current port mask
Figure 4-7-31 Forbidden Router Table Page Screenshot
182
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Object
VLAN ID
Port Mask
Description
Display the current VLAN ID
Display the current port mask
4.7.4.6 MLD Forward All
This page provides MLD Forward All. The Forward All screen in Figure 4-7-32 appears.
Figure 4-7-32 Forward All Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
VLAN ID
Port
Membership
Description
Select VLAN ID from this drop-down list to assign MLD membership
The switch port number of the logical port
Select MLD membership for each interface:
Forbidden:
Interface is forbidden from automatically joining the MLD via MVR.
None:
Static:
Interface is not a member of the VLAN. Packets associated with this VLAN will not be transmitted by the interface.
Interface is a member of the MLD.
183
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
4.7.5 MLD Snooping Statics
This page provides MLD Snooping Statics. The MLD Snooping Statics screen in Figure 4-7-33 appears.
Figure 4-7-33 Forward All Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Total RX
Valid RX
Invalid RX
Other RX
Leave RX
Report RX
General Query RX
Description
Display current total RX
Display current valid RX
Display current invalid RX
Display current other RX
Display current leave RX
Display current report RX
Display current general query RX
184
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Special Group Query
RX
Special Group &
Source Query RX
Leave TX
Report TX
General Query TX
Buttons
Special Group Query
TX
Special Group &
Source Query TX
Display current special group query RX
Display current special group & source query RX
Display current leave TX
Display current report TX
Display current general query TX
Display current special group query TX
Display current special group & source query TX
: Click to clear the MLD Snooping Statistics.
: Click to refresh the MLD Snooping Statistics.
185
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.7.6 Multicast Throttling Setting
Multicast throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join at the same time. When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port, the switch can take one of two actions; either “deny” or “replace”. If the action is set to deny, any new multicast join reports will be dropped. If the action is set to replace, the switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast group.
Once you have configured multicast profiles, you can assign them to interfaces on the Managed Switch. Also you can set the multicast throttling number to limit the number of multicast groups an interface can join at the same time. The MAX Group and
Information screens in Figure 4-7-34 & Figure 4-7-35 appear.
Figure 4-7-34 Max Groups and Action Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
IP Type
Port Select
Max Groups
Action
Description
Select IPv4 or IPv6 from this drop-down list
Select port number from this drop-down list
Sets the maximum number of multicast groups an interface can join at the same time.
Range: 0-256;
Default: 256
Sets the action to take when the maximum number of multicast groups for the interface has been exceeded.
(Default: Deny)
-Deny - The new multicast group join report is dropped
-Replace - The new multicast group replaces an existing group
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
186
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-7-35 IGMP Port Max Groups Information Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
Max Groups
Action
4.7.7 Multicast Filter
Description
The switch port number of the logical port
Display the current Max groups
Display the current action
In certain switch applications, the administrator may want to control the multicast services that are available to end users. For example, an IP/TV service is based on a specific subscription plan. The multicast filtering feature fulfills this requirement by restricting access to specified multicast services on a switch port.
Multicast filtering enables you to assign a profile to a switch port that specifies multicast groups that are permitted or denied on the port. A multicast filter profile can contain one or more, or a range of multicast addresses; but only one profile can be assigned to a port. When enabled, multicast join reports received on the port are checked against the filter profile. If a requested multicast group is permitted, the multicast join report is forwarded as normal. If a requested multicast group is denied, the multicast join report is dropped.
When you have created a Multicast profile number, you can then configure the multicast groups to filter and set the access mode.
Command Usage
Each profile has only one access mode; either permit or deny.
When the access mode is set to permit, multicast join reports are processed when a multicast group falls within the controlled range.
When the access mode is set to deny, multicast join reports are only processed when the multicast group is not in the controlled range.
187
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.7.7.1 Multicast Profile Setting
The Add Profile and Profile Status screens in Figure 4-7-36 & Figure 4-7-37 appear.
Figure 4-7-36 Add Profile Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
IP Type
Profile Index
Group from
Group to
Action
Description
Select IPv4 or IPv6 from this drop-down list
Indicates the ID of this particular profile
Specifies multicast groups to include in the profile. Specify a multicast group range by entering a start IP address.
Specifies multicast groups to include in the profile. Specify a multicast group range by entering an end IP address.
Sets the access mode of the profile; either permit or deny.
- Permit
Multicast join reports are processed when a multicast group falls within the controlled range.
- Deny
When the access mode is set to, multicast join reports are only processed when the multicast group is not in the controlled range.
Buttons
: Click to add multicast profile entry.
Figure 4-7-37 IGMP/MLD Profile Status Page Screenshot
188
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Index
IP Type
Group from
Group to
Action
Modify
Description
Display the current index
Display the current IP Type
Display the current group from
Display the current group to
Display the current action
Click to edit parameter.
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Click to delete the MLD/IGMP profile entry.
4.7.7.2 IGMP Filter Setting
The Filter Setting and Status screens in Figure 4-7-38 & Figure 4-7-39 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-7-38 Filter Setting Page Screenshot
Object
Port Select
Buttons
Filter Profile ID
: Click to apply changes.
Description
Select port number from this drop-down list
Select filter profile ID from this drop-down list
189
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-7-39 Port Filter Status Page Screenshot
Object
Port
Filter Profile ID
Action
Description
Display the current port
Display the current filter profile ID
Click to display detail profile parameter
Click to delete the IGMP filter profile entry
4.7.7.3 MLD Filter Setting
The Filter Setting and Status screens in Figure 4-7-40 & Figure 4-7-41 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-7-40 Filter Setting Page Screenshot
Object
Port Select
Buttons
Filter Profile ID
: Click to apply changes.
Description
Select port number from this drop-down list
Select filter profile ID from this drop-down list
190
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-7-41 Port Filter Status Page Screenshot
Object
Port
Filter Profile ID
Action
Description
Display the current port
Display the current filter profile ID
Click to display detail profile parameter
Click to delete the MLD filter profile entry
191
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.8 Quality of Service
4.8.1 Understanding QoS
Quality of Service (QoS) is an advanced traffic prioritization feature that allows you to establish control over network traffic. QoS enables you to assign various grades of network service to different types of traffic, such as multi-media, video, protocol-specific, time critical, and file-backup traffic.
QoS reduces bandwidth limitations, delay, loss, and jitter. It also provides increased reliability for delivery of your data and allows you to prioritize certain applications across your network. You can define exactly how you want the switch to treat selected applications and types of traffic.
You can use QoS on your system to:
Control a wide variety of network traffic by:
Classifying traffic based on packet attributes.
Assigning priorities to traffic (for example, to set higher priorities to time-critical or business-critical applications).
Applying security policy through traffic filtering.
Provide predictable throughput for multimedia applications such as video conferencing or voice over IP by minimizing delay and jitter.
Improve performance for specific types of traffic and preserve performance as the amount of traffic grows.
Reduce the need to constantly add bandwidth to the network.
Manage network congestion.
To implement QoS on your network, you need to carry out the following actions:
1.
Define a service level to determine the priority that will be applied to traffic.
2.
Apply a classifier to determine how the incoming traffic will be classified and thus treated by the Switch.
3.
Create a QoS profile which associates a service level and a classifier.
4.
Apply a QoS profile to a port(s).
The QoS page of the Managed Switch contains three types of QoS mode - the 802.1p mode, DSCP mode or Port-base mode can be selected. Both the three mode rely on predefined fields within the packet to determine the output queue.
802.1p Tag Priority Mode –The output queue assignment is determined by the IEEE 802.1p VLAN priority tag.
IP DSCP Mode - The output queue assignment is determined by the TOS or DSCP field in the IP packets.
Port-Base Priority Mode – Any packet received from the specify high priority port will treated as a high priority packet.
The Managed Switch supports eight priority level queue, the queue service rate is based on the WRR(Weight Round Robin) and WFQ (Weighted Fair Queuing) alorithm. The WRR ratio of high-priority and low-priority can be set to “4:1 and 8:1.
192
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.8.2 General
4.8.2.1 QoS Properties
The QoS Global Setting and Information screen in Figure 4-8-1 & Figure 4-8-2 appear.
Figure 4-8-1 QoS Global Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Buttons
Object
QoS Mode
: Click to apply changes.
Description
Enable or disable QoS mode
QoS Information
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-8-2 QoS Information Page Screenshot
Object
QoS Mode
Description
Display the current QoS mode
193
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.8.2.2 QoS Port Settings
The QoS Port Settings and Status screen in Figure 4-8-2 & Figure 4-8-3 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-8-2 QoS Port Setting Page Screenshot
Buttons
Object Description
Port Select
CoS Value
Select port number from this drop-down list
Select CoS value from this drop-down list
Remark CoS
Remark DSCP
Disable or enable remark CoS
Disable or enable remark DSCP
Remark IP Precedence
Disable or enable remark IP Precedence
: Click to apply changes.
QoS Port Status
Figure 4-8-3 QoS Port Status Page Screenshot
194
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Port
CoS Value
The switch port number of the logical port
Display the current CoS value
Remark CoS
Remark DSCP
Display the current remark CoS
Display the current remark DSCP
Remark IP Precedence
Display the current remark IP precedence
4.8.2.3 Queue Settings
The Queue Table and Information screens in Figure 4-8-4 & Figure 4-8-5 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-8-4 Queue Table Page Screenshot
Object
Queue
Strict Priority
WRR
Weight
Description
Display the current queue ID
Controls whether the scheduler mode is "Strict Priority" on this switch port
Controls whether the scheduler mode is "Weighted" on this switch port
Controls the weight for this queue. This value is restricted to 1-100. This parameter is only shown if "Scheduler Mode" is set to "Weighted".
% of WRR Bandwidth
Display the current bandwidth for each queue
195
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-8-5 Queue Information Page Screenshot
Object
Information Name
Information Value
Description
Display the current queue method information
Display the current queue value information
4.8.2.4 CoS Mapping
The CoS to Queue and Queue to CoS Mapping screens in Figure 4-8-6 & Figure 4-8-7 appear.
Figure 4-8-6 CoS to Queue and Queue to CoS Mapping Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Queue
Class of Service
Description
Select Queue value from this drop-down list
Select CoS value from this drop-down list
196
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
CoS Mapping
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-8-7 CoS Mapping Page Screenshot
Object
CoS
Mapping to Queue
Queue
Mapping to CoS
Description
Display the current CoS value
Display the current mapping to queue
Display the current queue value
Display the current mapping to CoS
197
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.8.2.5 DSCP Mapping
The DSCP to Queue and Queue to DSCP Mapping screens in Figure 4-8-8 & Figure 4-8-9 appear.
Figure 4-8-8 DSCP to Queue and Queue to DSCP Mapping Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Queue
Buttons
DSCP
: Click to apply changes.
Description
Select Queue value from this drop-down list
Select DSCP value from this drop-down list
198
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-8-9 DSCP Mapping Page Screenshot
Object
DSCP
Mapping to Queue
Queue
Mapping to DSCP
Description
Display the current CoS value
Display the current mapping to queue
Display the current queue value
Display the current mapping to DSCP
4.8.2.6 IP Precedence Mapping
The IP Precedence to Queue and Queue to IP Precedence Mapping screens in Figure 4-8-10 & Figure 4-8-11 appear.
Figure 4-8-10 IP Precedence to Queue and Queue to IP Precedence Mapping Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
199
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Object
Queue
Buttons
IP Precedence
: Click to apply changes.
Description
Select Queue value from this drop-down list
Select IP Precedence value from this drop-down list
Figure 4-8-11 IP Precedence Mapping Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
IP Precedence
Mapping to Queue
Queue
Mapping to IP
Precedence
Description
Display the current CoS value
Display the current mapping to queue
Display the current queue value
Display the current mapping to IP Precedence
200
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.8.3 QoS Basic Mode
4.8.3.1 Global Settings
The Basic Mode Global Settings and QoS Information screen in Figure 4-8-12 & Figure 4-8-13 appear.
Figure 4-8-12 Basic Mode Global Settings Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Buttons
Object
Trust Mode
: Click to apply changes.
Description
Set the QoS mode
QoS Information
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-8-13 QoS Information Page Screenshot
Object
Trust Mode
Description
Display the current QoS mode
201
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.8.3.2 Port Settings
The QoS Port Setting and Status screen in Figure 4-8-14 & Figure 4-8-15 appear.
Figure 4-8-14 Basic Mode Global Settings Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Buttons
Object
Port
Trust Mode
: Click to apply changes.
Description
Select port number from this drop-down list
Enable or disable the trust mode
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-8-15 QoS Port Status Page Screenshot
Object
Port
Trust Mode
Description
The switch port number of the logical port
Display the current trust type
202
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.8.4 Rate Limit
Configure the switch port rate limit for the switch port on this page.
4.8.4.1 Ingress Bandwidth Control
This page provides to select the ingress bandwidth preamble. The Ingress Bandwidth Control Setting and Status screens in
Figure 4-8-16 & Figure 4-8-17 appear.
Figure 4-8-16 Ingress Bandwidth Control Settings Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
State
Rate (Kbps)
Description
Select port number from this drop-down list
Enable or disable the port rate policer. The default value is "Disabled".
Configure the rate for the port policer. The default value is "unlimited". Valid values are in the range 0 to 1000000.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-8-17 Ingress Bandwidth Control Status Page Screenshot
203
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Port
The switch port number of the logical port
Ingress Rate Limit (Kbps)
Display the current ingress rate limit
4.8.4.2 Egress Bandwidth Control
This page provides to select the egress bandwidth preamble. The Egress Bandwidth Control Setting and Status screens in
Figure 4-8-18 & Figure 4-8-19 appear.
Figure 4-8-18 Egress Bandwidth Control Settings Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
State
Rate (Kbps)
Description
Select port number from this drop-down list
Enable or disable the port rate policer. The default value is "Disabled".
Configure the rate for the port policer. The default value is "unlimited". Valid values are in the range 0 to 1000000.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-8-19 Egress Bandwidth Control Status Page Screenshot
204
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
Port
The switch port number of the logical port
Egress Rate Limit (Kbps)
Display the current egress rate limit
4.8.4.3 Egress Queue
The Egress Queue Bandwidth Control Settings and Status screens in Figure 4-8-20 & Figure 4-8-21 appear.
Figure 4-8-20 Egress Queue Bandwidth Settings Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
Queue
State
CIR (Kbps)
Description
Select port number from this drop-down list
Select queue number from this drop-down list
Enable or disable the port rate policer. The default value is "Disabled".
Configure the CIR for the port policer. The default value is "unlimited". Valid values are in the range 0 to 1000000.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-8-21 Egress Queue Status Page Screenshot
205
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Queue ID
Rate Limit (Kbps)
4.8.5 Voice VLAN
Description
Display the current queue ID
Display the current rate limit
4.5.8.1 Introduction to Voice VLAN
Configure the switch port rate limit for the switch port on this page.
Voice VLAN is specially configured for the user voice data traffic. By setting a Voice VLAN and adding the ports of the connected voice equipments to Voice VLAN, the user will be able to configure QoS (Quality of service) service for voice data, and improve voice data traffic transmission priority to ensure the calling quality.
The switch can judge if the data traffic is the voice data traffic from specified equipment according to the source MAC address field of the data packet entering the port. The packet with the source MAC address complying with the system defined voice equipment OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier) will be considered the voice data traffic and transmitted to the Voice
VLAN.
The configuration is based on MAC address, acquiring a mechanism in which every voice equipment transmitting information through the network has got its unique MAC address. VLAN will trace the address belongs to specified MAC. By This means,
VLAN allows the voice equipment always belong to Voice VLAN when relocated physically. The greatest advantage of the VLAN is the equipment can be automatically placed into Voice VLAN according to its voice traffic which will be transmitted at specified priority. Meanwhile, when voice equipment is physically relocated, it still belongs to the Voice VLAN without any further configuration modification, which is because it is based on voice equipment other than switch port.
The Voice VLAN feature enables the voice traffic to forward on the Voice VLAN, and then the switch can be classified and scheduled to network traffic. It is recommended there are two
VLANs on a port -- one for voice, one for data.
Before connecting the IP device to the switch, the IP phone should configure the voice VLAN
ID correctly. It should be configured through its own GUI.
206
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.8.5.2 Properties
The Voice VLAN feature enables voice traffic to forward on the Voice VLAN, and then the switch can be classified and scheduled to network traffic. It is recommended that there are two VLANs on a port -- one for voice, one for data.
Before connecting the IP device to the switch, the IP phone should configure the voice VLAN ID correctly. It should be configured through its own GUI. This page provides to select the ingress bandwidth preamble. The Ingress Bandwidth Control
Setting/Status screen in Figure 4-8-22 & Figure 4-8-23 appears.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-8-22 Properties Page Screenshot
Buttons
Object
Voice VLAN State
Voice VLAN ID
Remark CoS/802.1p
1p remark
Aging Time (30-65536 min)
Description
Indicates the Voice VLAN mode operation. We must disable M STP feature before we enable Voice VLAN. It can avoid the conflict of ing ress filter. Possible modes are:
■
Enabled: Enable Voice VLAN mode operation.
■
Disabled: Disable Voice VLAN mode operation
Indicates the Voice VLAN ID. It s hould be a unique VLAN ID in the system and cannot equal each port PVID. It is conflict con figuration if the value equal management VID, MVR VID, PVID, etc.
The allowed range is 1 to 4095.
Select 802.1p value from this drop-down list
Enable or disable 802.1p r emark
The time after which a port is removed from the Voice VLAN when VoIP traffic is no longer received on the port.
(\Default: 1440 minutes).
: Click to apply changes.
207
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-8-23 Properties Page Screenshot
Object
Voice VLAN State
Voice VLAN ID
Remark CoS/802.1p
1p remark
Aging
Description
Display the current voice VLAN state.
Display the current voice VLAN ID.
Display the current remark CoS /802.1p.
Display the current 1p remark.
Display the current aging time.
4.8.5.3 Telephony OUI MAC Setting
Configure VOICE VLAN OUI table on this Page. The Telephony OUI MAC Setting screens in Figure 4-8-24 & Figure 4-8-25 appear.
Figure 4-8-24 Voice VLAN OUI Settings Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
208
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Object
OUI Address
Description
A telep hony OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by
IEEE.
It must be 6 characters long and the input format is "xx:xx:xx" (x is a hexadecimal digit).
User-defined text that identifies the VoIP devices
Buttons
Description
: Click to add voice VLAN OUI setting.
Figure 4-8-25 Voice VLAN OUI Group Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
OUI Address
Description
Modify
Description
Display the current OUI address
Display the current description
Click to edit voice VLAN OUI group parameter
Click to delete voice VLAN OUI group parameter
209
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.8.5.4 Telephony OUI Port Setting
The Voice VLAN feature enables voice traffic forwarding on the Voice VLAN, then the switch can classify and schedule network traffic. It is recommended that there be two VLANs on a port - one for voice, one for data. Before connecting the IP device to the switch, the IP phone should configure the voice VLAN ID correctly. It should be configured through its own GUI. The Telephony
OUI MAC Setting screens in Figure 4-8-26 & Figure 4-8-27 appear.
Figure 4-8-26 Voice VLAN Port Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Buttons
Object
Port
State
CoS Mode
: Click to apply changes.
Description
Select port number from this drop-down list
Enable or disable the voice VLAN port setting. The default value is "Disabled".
Select the current CoS mode
Figure 4-8-27 Voice VLAN Port State Page Screenshot
210
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
State
CoS Mode
Description
The switch port number of the logical port
Display the current state
Display the current CoS mode
211
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.9 Security
This section is to control the access of the Managed Switch, including the user access and management control.
The Security Page contains links to the following main topics:
802.1x
Radius Server
TACACS+ Server
AAA
Access
Management Access Method
DHCP Snooping
Dynamic ARP Inspection
IP Source Guard
Port Security
DoS
Strom Control
4.9.1 802.1X
Overview of 802.1X (Port-based) Authentication
In the 802.1X-world, the user is called the supplicant, the switch is the authenticator, and the RADIUS server is the authentication server. The switch acts as the man-in-the-middle, forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the authentication server. Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802.1X frames, known as EAPOL
(EAP over LANs) frames. EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs (RFC3748). Frames sent between the switch and the
RADIUS server are RADIUS packets. RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch's IP address, name, and the supplicant's port number on the switch. EAP is very flexible, in that it allows for different authentication methods, like MD5-Challenge, PEAP, and TLS. The important thing is that the authenticator (the switch) doesn't need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using, or how many information exchange frames are needed for a particular method. The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type (EAPOL or RADIUS) and forwards it.
When authentication is complete, the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication. Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant, the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant.
Overview of User Authentication
It is allowed to configure the Managed Switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local or remote authentication methods, such as telnet and Web browser. This Managed Switch provides secure network management access using the following options:
212
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS)
Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus (TACACS+)
Local user name and Privilege Level control
4.9.1.1 Understanding IEEE 802.1X Port-based Authentication
The IEEE 802.1X standard defines a client-server-based access control and authentication protocol that restricts unauthorized clients from connecting to a LAN through publicly accessible ports. The authentication server authenticates each client connected to a switch port before making available any services offered by the switch or the LAN.
Until the client is authenticated, 802.1X access control allows only Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL) traffic through the port to which the client is connected. After authentication is successful, normal traffic can pass through the port.
This section includes this conceptual information:
Device Roles
Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange
Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States
Device Roles
With 802.1X port-based authentication, the devices in the network have specific roles as shown below.
Figure 4-9-1
213
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Client
—the device (workstation) that requests access to the LAN and switch services and responds to requests from the switch. The workstation must be running 802.1X-compliant client software such as that offered in the Microsoft
Windows XP operating system. (The client is the supplicant in the IEEE 802.1X specification.)
Authentication server
—performs the actual authentication of the client. The authentication server validates the identity of the client and notifies the switch whether or not the client is authorized to access the LAN and switch services.
Because the switch acts as the proxy, the authentication service is transparent to the client. In this release, the Remote
Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) security system with Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) extensions is the only supported authentication server; it is available in Cisco Secure Access Control Server version 3.0.
RADIUS operates in a client/server model in which secure authentication information is exchanged between the
RADIUS server and one or more RADIUS clients.
Switch
(802.1X device)—controls the physical access to the network based on the authentication status of the client.
The switch acts as an intermediary (proxy) between the client and the authentication server, requesting identity information from the client, verifying that information with the authentication server, and relaying a response to the client.
The switch includes the RADIUS client, which is responsible for encapsulating and decapsulating the Extensible
Authentication Protocol (EAP) frames and interacting with the authentication server. When the switch receives EAPOL frames and relays them to the authentication server, the Ethernet header is stripped and the remaining EAP frame is re-encapsulated in the RADIUS format. The EAP frames are not modified or examined during encapsulation, and the authentication server must support EAP within the native frame format. When the switch receives frames from the authentication server, the server's frame header is removed, leaving the EAP frame, which is then encapsulated for
Ethernet and sent to the client.
Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange
The switch or the client can initiate authentication. If you enable authentication on a port by using the dot1x port-control auto interface configuration command, the switch must initiate authentication when it determines that the port link state transitions from down to up. It then sends an EAP-request/identity frame to the client to request its identity (typically, the switch sends an initial identity/request frame followed by one or more requests for authentication information). Upon receipt of the frame, the client responds with an EAP-response/identity frame.
However, if during bootup, the client does not receive an EAP-request/identity frame from the switch, the client can initiate authentication by sending an EAPOL-start frame, which prompts the switch to request the client's identity
If 802.1X is not enabled or supported on the network access device, any EAPOL frames from the client are dropped. If the client does not receive an EAP-request/identity frame after three attempts to start authentication, the client transmits frames as if the port is in the authorized state. A port in the authorized state effectively means that the client has been successfully authenticated.
When the client supplies its identity, the switch begins its role as the intermediary, passing EAP frames between the client and the authentication server until authentication succeeds or fails. If the authentication succeeds, the switch port becomes authorized.
214
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The specific exchange of EAP frames depends on the authentication method being used. “ Figure 4-9-2 ” shows a message exchange initiated by the client using the One-Time-Password (OTP) authentication method with a RADIUS server.
Figure 4-9-2 EAP Message Exchange
Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States
The switch port state determines whether or not the client is granted access to the network. The port starts in the unauthorized state. While in this state, the port disallows all ingress and egress traffic except for 802.1X protocol packets. When a client is successfully authenticated, the port transitions to the authorized state, allowing all traffic for the client to flow normally.
If a client that does not support 802.1X is connected to an unauthorized 802.1X port, the switch requests the client's identity. In this situation, the client does not respond to the request, the port remains in the unauthorized state, and the client is not granted access to the network.
In contrast, when an 802.1X-enabled client connects to a port that is not running the 802.1X protocol, the client initiates the authentication process by sending the EAPOL-start frame. When no response is received, the client sends the request for a fixed number of times. Because no response is received, the client begins sending frames as if the port is in the authorized state
If the client is successfully authenticated (receives an Accept frame from the authentication server), the port state changes to authorized, and all frames from the authenticated client are allowed through the port. If the authentication fails, the port remains in the unauthorized state, but authentication can be retried. If the authentication server cannot be reached, the switch can retransmit the request. If no response is received from the server after the specified number of attempts, authentication fails, and network access is not granted.
When a client logs off, it sends an EAPOL-logoff message, causing the switch port to transition to the unauthorized state.
If the link state of a port transitions from up to down, or if an EAPOL-logoff frame is received, the port returns to the unauthorized state.
215
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.9.1.2 802.1X Setting
This page allows you to configure the IEEE 802.1X authentication system.
The IEEE 802.1X standard defines a port-based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication. One or more central servers, the backend servers, determine whether the user is allowed access to the network. These backend (RADIUS) servers are configured on the "Security→802.1X
Access Control→802.1X Setting" page. The IEEE802.1X standard defines port-based operation, but non-standard variants overcome security limitations as shall be explored below.
The 802.1X Setting and Information screens in Figure 4-9-3 & Figure 4-9-4 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-9-3 802.1X Setting Page Screenshot
Object
802.1X
Description
Indicates if NAS is globally enabled or disabled on the switch. If globally disabled, all ports are allowed forwarding of frames.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-9-4 802.1X Information Page Screenshot
Object
802.1X
Description
Display the current 802.1X state
216
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.9.1.3 802.1X Port Setting
This page allows you to configure the IEEE 802.1X Port Setting. The 802.1X Port Setting screens in Figure 4-9-5 & Figure 4-9-6 appear.
Figure 4-9-5 802.1X Port Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
Mode
Reauthentication
Enable
Description
Select port from this drop-down list
If NAS is globally enabled, this selection controls the port's authentication mode.
The following modes are available:
No Authentication
Authentication
Force Authorized
In this mode, the switch will send one EAPOL Success frame when the port link comes up, and any client on the port will be allowed network access without authentication.
Force Unauthorized
In this mode, the switch will send one EAPOL Failure frame when the port link comes up, and any client on the port will be disallowed network access.
If checked, successfully authenticated supplicants/clients are reauthenticated after the interval specified by the Reauthentication Period. Reauthentication for
802.1X-enabled ports can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a
217
Buttons
Reauthentication
Period
Quiet Period
Supplicant Period
Maximum Request
Retries
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
switch port or if a supplicant is no longer attached.
Determines the period, in seconds, after which a connected client must be reauthenticated. This is only active if the Reauthentication Enabled checkbox is checked.
Valid values are in the range 30 to 65535 seconds.
Sets time to keep silent on supplicant authentication failure.
Sets the interval for the supplicant to re-transmit EAP request/identify frame.
The number of times that the switch transmits an EAPOL Request Identity frame without response before considering entering the Guest VLAN is adjusted with this setting.
The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled.
: Click to apply changes.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-9-6 802.1X Port Status Page Screenshot
Object
Port
Mode (pps)
Status (pps)
Periodic
Reauthentication
Description
The switch port number of the logical port.
Display the current mode.
Display the current status.
Display the current periodic reauthentication.
218
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Reauthentication
Period
Quiet Period
Supplicant Timeout
Max. EAP Requests
Modify
Display the current reauthentication period.
Display the current quiet period.
Display the current supplicant timeout.
Display the current Max. EAP requests.
Click to edit 802.1X port setting parameter.
4.9.1.4 Guest VLAN Setting
Overview
When a Guest VLAN enabled port's link comes up, the switch starts transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames. If the number of transmissions of such frames exceeds Max. Reauth. Count and no EAPOL frames have been received in the meantime, the switch considers entering the Guest VLAN. The interval between transmission of EAPOL Request Identity frames is configured with EAPOL Timeout. If Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is enabled, the port will now be placed in the Guest VLAN. If disabled, the switch will first check its history to see if an EAPOL frame has previously been received on the port (this history is cleared if the port link goes down or the port's Admin State is changed), and if not, the port will be placed in the Guest VLAN. Otherwise it will not move to the Guest VLAN, but continue transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames at the rate given by EAPOL
Timeout.
Once in the Guest VLAN, the port is considered authenticated, and all attached clients on the port are allowed access on this
VLAN. The switch will not transmit an EAPOL Success frame when entering the Guest VLAN.
While in the Guest VLAN, the switch monitors the link for EAPOL frames, and if one such frame is received, the switch immediately takes the port out of the Guest VLAN and starts authenticating the supplicant according to the port mode. If an
EAPOL frame is received, the port will never be able to go back into the Guest VLAN if the "Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen" is disabled.
The 802.1X Guest VLAN setting screens in Figure 4-9-7 & Figure 4-9-8 appear.
Figure 4-9-7 Guest VLAN Setting Page Screenshot
219
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Buttons
Object
Guest VLAN ID
Description
This is the value that a port's Port VLAN ID is set to if a port is moved into the
Guest VLAN. It is only changeable if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled.
Guest VLAN Enabled
Valid values are in the range [1~4094].
A Guest VLAN is a special VLAN - typically with limited network access - on which 802.1X-unaware clients are placed after a network administrator-defined timeout. The switch follows a set of rules for entering and leaving the Guest
VLAN as listed below.
Guest VLAN Port
Setting
The "Guest VLAN Enabled" checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable/disable Guest VLAN functionality.
When checked, the individual ports' ditto setting determines whether the port can be moved into Guest VLAN.
When unchecked, the ability to move to the Guest VLAN is disabled for all ports.
When Guest VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled (checked) for a given port, the switch considers moving the port into the Guest VLAN according to the rules outlined below.
This option is only available for EAPOL-based modes, i.e.:
• Port-based 802.1X
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-9-8 Guest VLAN Status Page Screenshot
220
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port Name
Enable State
In Guest VLAN
Description
The switch port number of the logical port
Display the current state
Display the current guest VLAN
4.9.1.5 Authenticated Host
The Authenticated Host Table screen in Figure 4-9-9 appears.
Figure 4-9-9 Authenticated Host Table Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Description
User Name
Port
Session Time
Display the current user name
Display the current port number
Display the current session time
Authentication Method
Display the current authentication method
MAC Address
Display the current MAC address
221
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.9.2 RADIUS Server
This page is to configure the RADIUS server connection session parameters. The RADIUS Settings screens in Figure 4-9-10 ,
Figure 4-9-11 & Figure 4-9-12 appears.
Figure 4-9-10 Use Default Parameters Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Retries
Timeout for Reply
Dead Time
Key String
Description
Timeout is the number of seconds, in the range 1 to 10, to wait for a reply from a
RADIUS server before retransmitting the request.
Retransmit is the number of times, in the range 1 to 30, a RADIUS request is retransmitted to a server that is not responding. If the server has not responded after the last retransmit it is considered to be dead.
The Dead Time, which can be set to a number between 0 and 3600 seconds, is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request. This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already determined as dead.
Setting the Dead Time to a value greater than 0 (zero) will enable this feature, but only if more than one server has been configured.
The secret key - up to 63 characters long - shared between the RADIUS server and the switch.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
222
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-9-11 New Radius Server Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Server Definition
Server IP
Authentication Port
Acct Port
Key String
Timeout for Reply
Retries
Description
Set the server definition
Address of the Radius server IP/name
The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Authentication Server. If the port is set to 0
(zero), the default port (1812) is used on the RADIUS Authentication Server.
The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Accounting Server. If the port is set to 0
(zero), the default port (1813) is used on the RADIUS Accounting Server.
The shared key - shared between the RADIUS Authentication Server and the switch.
The Timeout, which can be set to a number between 1 and 30 seconds, is the maximum time to wait for a reply from a server.
If the server does not reply within this timeframe, we will consider it to be dead and continue with the next enabled server (if any).
RADIUS servers are using the UDP protocol, which is unreliable by design. In order to cope with lost frames, the timeout interval is divided into 3 subintervals of equal length. If a reply is not received within the subinterval, the request is transmitted again. This algorithm causes the RADIUS server to be queried up to
3 times before it is considered to be dead.
Timeout is the number of seconds, in the range 1 to 10, to wait for a reply from a
RADIUS server before retransmitting the request.
223
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Server Priority
Dead Time
Usage Type
Set the server priority
The Dead Time, which can be set to a number between 0 and 3600 seconds, is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request. This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already determined as dead.
Setting the Dead Time to a value greater than 0 (zero) will enable this feature, but only if more than one server has been configured.
Set the usage type. The following modes are available:
Login
802.1X
All
Buttons
: Click to add Radius server setting.
Figure 4-9-12 Login Authentication List Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
IP Address
Auth Port
Acct Port
Key
Timeout
Retries
Priority
Dead Time
Usage Type
Modify
Description
Display the current IP address
Display the current auth port
Display the current acct port
Display the current key
Display the current timeout
Display the current retry times
Display the current priority
Display the current dead time
Display the current usage type
Click to edit login authentication list parameter.
Click to delete login authentication list entry.
224
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.9.3 TACACS+ Server
This page is to configure the RADIUS server connection session parameters. The RADIUS Settings screens in Figure 4-9-13 ,
Figure 4-9-14 & Figure 4-9-15 appear.
Figure 4-9-13 Guest VLAN Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Key String
Timeout for Reply
Description
The secret key - up to 63 characters long - shared between the TACACS+ server and the switch.
Retransmit is the number of times, in the range 1 to 30, a TACACS+ request is retransmitted to a server that is not responding. If the server has not responded after the last retransmit it is considered to be dead.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-9-14 New Radius Server Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
225
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Object
Server Definition
Server IP
Server Port
Server Key
Server Timeout
Server Priority
Buttons
: Click to add Radius server setting.
Description
Set the server definition
Address of the TACACS+ server IP/name
Network (TCP) port of TACACS+ server used for authentication messages.
(Range: 1-65535; Default: 49)
The key- shared between the TACACS+ Authentication Server and the switch.
The number of seconds the switch waits for a reply from the server before it resends the request.
Set the server priority
Figure 4-9-15 Login Authentication List Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
IP Address
Port
Key
Timeout
Retries
Priority
Modify
Description
Display the current IP address
Display the current port
Display the current key
Display the current timeout
Display the current retry times
Display the current priority
Click to edit login authentication list parameter
Click to delete login authentication list entry
226
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.9.4 AAA
Authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) provides a framework for configuring access control on the Managed
Switch. The three security functions can be summarized as follows:
Authentication — Identifies users that request access to the network.
Authorization — Determines if users can access specific services.
Accounting — Provides reports, auditing, and billing for services that users have accessed on the network.
The AAA functions require the use of configured RADIUS or TACACS+ servers in the network. The security servers can be defined as sequential groups that are then applied as a method for controlling user access to specified services. For example, when the switch attempts to authenticate a user, a request is sent to the first server in the defined group, if there is no response the second server will be tried, and so on. If at any point a pass or fail is returned, the process stops.
The Managed Switch supports the following AAA features:
Accounting for IEEE 802.1X authenticated users that access the network through the Managed Switch.
Accounting for users that access management interfaces on the Managed Switch through the Telnet.
Accounting for commands that users enter at specific CLI privilege levels. Authorization of users that access management interfaces on the Managed Switch through the Telnet.
To configure AAA on the Managed Switch, you need to follow this general process:
1. Configure RADIUS and TACACS+ server access parameters. See “
Configuring Local/Remote Logon
Authentication
”.
2. Define RADIUS and TACACS+ server groups to support the accounting and authorization of services.
3. Define a method name for each service to which you want to apply accounting or authorization and specify the
RADIUS or TACACS+ server groups to use. Apply the method names to port or line interfaces.
This guide assumes that RADIUS and TACACS+ servers have already been configured to support AAA. The configuration of RADIUS and TACACS+ server software is beyond the scope of this guide, refer to the documentation provided with the RADIUS or TACACS+ server software.
227
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.9.4.1 Login List
This page is to login list parameters. The authentication list screen in Figure 4-9-17 & Figure 4-9-18 appears.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-9-17 New Authentication List Screenshot
Object
List Name
Method 1-4
Buttons
: Click to add authentication list.
Description
Defines a name for the authentication list
Set the login authentication method:
Empty / None / Local / TACACS+ / RADIUS / Enable
Figure 4-9-18 Login Authentication List Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
List Name
Method List
Modify
Description
Display the current list name
Display the current method list
Click to edit login authentication list parameter
Click to delete login authentication list entry
228
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.9.4.2 Enable List
This page is to login list parameters. The authentication list screens in Figure 4-9-19 & Figure 4-9-20 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-9-19 New Authentication List Screenshot
Object
List Name
Method 1-3
Buttons
: Click to add authentication list.
Description
Defines a name for the authentication list
Set the login authentication method:
Empty / None / Enable / TACACS+ / RADIUS
Figure 4-9-20 Login Authentication List Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
List Name
Method List
Modify
Description
Display the current list name
Display the current method list
Click to edit login authentication list parameter
Click to delete login authentication list entry
229
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.9.5 Access
This section is to control the access of the Managed Switch, including the different access methods – Telnet, SSH, HTTP and
HTTPs.
4.9.5.1 Telnet
The Telnet Settings and Information screen in Figure 4-9-21 & Figure 4-9-22 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-9-21 Telnet Settings Page Screenshot
Buttons
Object
Telnet Service
Login Authentication List
Description
Disable or enable telnet service
Select login authentication list from this drop-down list
Enable Authentication List
Select enable authentication list from this drop-down list
Session Timeout
Set the session timeout value
Password Retry Count
Silent Time
Set the password retry count value
Set the silent time value
: Click to apply changes
: Click to disconnect telnet communication
230
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-9-21 Telnet Information Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Telnet Service
Description
Display the current Telnet service
Login Authentication List
Display the current login authentication list
Enable Authentication List
Display the current enable authentication list
Session Timeout
Display the current session timeout
Password Retry Count
Silent Time
Current Telnet Session
Count
4.9.5.2 SSH
Display the current password retry count
Display the current silent time
Display the current telnet session count
Configure SSH on this Page. This Page shows the Port Security status. Port Security is a module with no direct configuration.
Configuration comes indirectly from other modules - the user modules. When a user module has enabled port security on a port, the port is set-up for software-based learning. In this mode, frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module, which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it. For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state, all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward. If only one chooses to block it, it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise.
The SSH Settings and Information screens in Figure 4-9-23 & Figure 4-9-24 appear.
231
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-9-23 SSH Settings Page Screenshot
Object Description
SSH Service
Login Authentication List
Disable or enable SSH service
Select login authentication list from this drop-down list
Enable Authentication List
Select enable authentication list from this drop-down list
Session Timeout
Set the session timeout value
Password Retry Count
Set the password retry count value
Silent Time
Set the silent time value
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
: Click to disconnect telnet communication.
Figure 4-9-24 SSH Information Page Screenshot
232
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Object
SSH Service
Login Authentication List
Description
Display the current SSH service
Display the current login authentication list
Enable Authentication List
Display the current enable authentication list
Session Timeout
Display the current session timeout
Password Retry Count
Silent Time
Display the current password retry count
Display the current silent time
Current SSH Session Count
Display the current SSH session count
4.9.5.3 HTTP
The HTTP Settings and Information screens in Figure 4-9-25 & Figure 4-9-26 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-9-25 HTTP Settings Page Screenshot
Buttons
Object
HTTP Service
Description
Disable or enable HTTP service
Login Authentication List
Select login authentication list from this drop-down list
Session Timeout
Set the session timeout value
: Click to apply changes.
233
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-9-26 HTTP Information Page Screenshot
Object Description
HTTP Service
Display the current HTTP service
Login Authentication List
Display the current login authentication list
Session Timeout
Display the current session timeout
4.9.5.4 HTTPs
The HTTPs Settings and Information screen in Figure 4-9-27 & Figure 4-9-28 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-9-27 HTTPs Settings Page Screenshot
Buttons
Object
HTTPs Service
Login Authentication List
Session Timeout
: Click to apply changes.
Description
Disable or enable HTTPs service
Select login authentication list from this drop-down list
Set the session timeout value
234
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-9-28 HTTPs Information Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
HTTPs Service
Description
Display the current HTTPs service
Login Authentication List
Display the current login authentication list
Session Timeout
Display the current session timeout
4.9.6 Management Access Method
4.9.6.1 Profile Rules
The Profile Rule Table Setting and Table screens in Figure 4-9-29 & Figure 4-9-30 appear.
Figure 4-9-29 Profile Rule Table Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Access Profile Name
(1-32 characters)
Priority (1-65535)
Description
Indicates the access profile name
Set priority
The allowed value is from 1 to 65535
235
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Management Method
Action
Buttons
Port
IP-Source
: Click to apply changes.
Indicates the host can access the switch from
HTTP/HTTPs/telnet/SSH/SNMP/All interface that the host IP address matched the entry.
An IP address can contain any combination of permit or deny rules.
(Default: Permit rules)Sets the access mode of the profile; either permit or
deny.
Select port from this drop-down list
Indicates the IP address for the access management entry
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-9-30 Profile Rule Table Page Screenshot
Object Description
Access Profile Name
Display the current access profile name
Priority
Display the current priority
Management Method
Action
Port
Source IPv4
Display the current management method
Display the current action
Display the current port list
Display the current source IPv4 address
Source IPv4 Mask
Source IPv6
Source IPv6 Prefix
Modify
Display the current source IPv4 mask
Display the current source IPv6 address
Display the current source IPv6 prefix
Click to edit profile rule parameter
Click to delete profile rule entry
236
4.9.6.2 Access Rules
The access profile screens in Figure 4-9-31 & Figure 4-9-32 appear.
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-9-31 Access Profile Page Screenshot
Buttons
Object
Access Profile
: Click to apply changes.
Description
Select access profile from this drop-down list
Figure 4-9-32 Access Profile Table Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Access Profile
Delete
Description
Display the current access profile
Click to delete access profile entry
237
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.9.7 DHCP Snooping
4.9.7.1 DHCP Snooping Overview
The addresses assigned to DHCP clients on unsecure ports can be carefully controlled using the dynamic bindings registered with DHCP Snooping. DHCP snooping allows a switch to protect a network from rogue DHCP servers or other devices which send port-related information to a DHCP server. This information can be useful in tracking an IP address back to a physical port.
Command Usage
Network traffic may be disrupted when malicious DHCP messages are received from an outside source.
DHCP snooping is
used to filter DHCP messages received on a non-secure interface from outside the network or firewall. When DHCP snooping is enabled globally and enabled on a VLAN interface,
DHCP messages received on an untrusted interface from
a device not listed in the DHCP snooping table will be dropped.
Table entries are only learned for trusted interfaces. An entry is added or removed dynamically to the DHCP snooping table when a client receives or releases an IP address from a DHCP server. Each entry includes a MAC address, IP address, lease time, VLAN identifier, and port identifier.
When DHCP snooping is enabled, DHCP messages entering an untrusted interface are filtered based upon dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping.
Filtering rules are implemented as follows:
238
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
■
If the global DHCP snooping is disabled, all DHCP packets are forwarded.
■
If DHCP snooping is enabled globally, and also enabled on the VLAN where the DHCP packet is received, all DHCP packets are forwarded for a trusted port. If the received packet is a DHCP ACK message, a dynamic DHCP snooping entry is also added to the binding table.
■
If DHCP snooping is enabled globally, and also enabled on the VLAN where the DHCP packet is received, but the port is not trusted, it is processed as follows:
If the DHCP packet is a reply packet from a DHCP server (including OFFER, ACK or NAK messages), the packet is dropped.
If the DHCP packet is from a client, such as a DECLINE or RELEASE message, the switch forwards the packet only if the corresponding entry is found in the binding table.
If the DHCP packet is from a client, such as a DISCOVER, REQUEST, INFORM, DECLINE or
RELEASE message, the packet is forwarded if MAC address verification is disabled. However, if MAC address verification is enabled, then the packet will only be forwarded if the client’s hardware address stored in the DHCP packet is the same as the source MAC address in the Ethernet header.
If the DHCP packet is not a recognizable type, it is dropped.
If a DHCP packet from a client passes the filtering criteria above, it will only be forwarded to trusted ports in the same VLAN.
If a DHCP packet is from server is received on a trusted port, it will be forwarded to both trusted and untrusted ports in the same VLAN.
If the DHCP snooping is globally disabled, all dynamic bindings are removed from the binding table.
■
Additional considerations when the switch itself is a DHCP client – The port(s) through which the switch submits a client request to the DHCP server must be configured as trusted. Note that the switch will not add a dynamic entry for itself to the binding table when it receives an ACK message from a DHCP server. Also, when the switch sends out DHCP client packets for itself, no filtering takes place. However, when the switch receives any messages from a
DHCP server, any packets received from untrusted ports are dropped.
4.9.7.2 Global Setting
DHCP Snooping is used to block intruder on the untrusted ports of switch when it tries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between the DHCP client and server. Configure DHCP Snooping on this page. The
DHCP Snooping Setting and Information screens in Figure 4-9-33 & Figure 4-9-34 appear.
Figure 4-9-33 DHCP Snooping Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
239
Object
DHCP Snooping
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Description
Indicates the DHCP snooping mode operation. Possible modes are:
Enabled: Enable DHCP snooping mode operation.
When enable DHCP snooping mode operation, the request
DHCP messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allowed reply packets from trusted ports.
Disabled: Disable DHCP snooping mode operation.
Figure 4-9-34 DHCP Snooping Information Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
DHCP Snooping
Description
Display the current DHCP snooping status
4.9.7.3 DHCP Snooping VLAN Setting
Command Usage
When DHCP snooping is enabled globally on the switch, and enabled on the specified VLAN, DHCP packet filtering will be performed on any untrusted ports within the VLAN.
When the DHCP snooping is globally disabled, DHCP snooping can still be configured for specific VLANs, but the changes will not take effect until DHCP snooping is globally re-enabled.
When DHCP snooping is globally enabled, and DHCP snooping is then disabled on a VLAN, all dynamic bindings learned for this VLAN are removed from the binding table.
The DHCP Snooping VLAN Setting screens in Figure 4-9-35 & Figure 4-9-36 appear.
240
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-9-35 DHCP Snooping VLAN Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
VLAN List
Status
Description
Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN.
Indicates the DHCP snooping mode operation. Possible modes are:
Enabled: Enable DHCP snooping mode operation.
When enable DHCP snooping mode operation, the request
DHCP messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allowed reply packets from trusted ports.
Disabled: Disable DHCP snooping mode operation.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-9-36 DHCP Snooping VLAN Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
VLAN List
Status
Description
Display the current VLAN list
Display the current DHCP snooping status
241
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.9.7.4 Port Setting
Configures switch ports as trusted or untrusted.
Command Usage
A trusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive only messages from within the network. An untrusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive messages from outside the network or firewall.
When DHCP snooping enabled both globally and on a VLAN, DHCP packet filtering will be performed on any untrusted ports within the VLAN.
When an untrusted port is changed to a trusted port, all the dynamic DHCP snooping bindings associated with this port are removed.
Set all ports connected to DHCP servers within the local network or firewall to trusted state. Set all other ports outside the local network or firewall to untrusted state.
The DHCP Snooping Port Setting screen in Figure 4-9-37 & Figure 4-9-38 appears.
Figure 4-9-37 DHCP Snooping Port Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
Type
Chaddr Check
Description
Select port from this drop-down list
Indicates the DHCP snooping port mode. Possible port modes are:
Trusted: Configures the port as trusted sources of the DHCP message.
Untrusted: Configures the port as untrusted sources of the DHCP message.
Indicates that the Chaddr check function is enabled on selected port.
Chaddr: Client hardware address.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
242
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-9-38 DHCP Snooping Port Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
Type
Chaddr Check
Description
The switch port number of the logical port
Display the current type
Display the current chaddr check
243
4.9.7.5 Statistics
The DHCP Snooping Statistics screen in Figure 4-9-39 appears.
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-9-39 DHCP Snooping Statistics Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Buttons
Object
Port
Forwarded
Description
The switch port number of the logical port
Display the current forwarded
Chaddr Check Dropped
Display the chaddr check dropped
Untrusted Port Dropped
Display untrusted port dropped
Untrusted Port with
Option82 Dropped
Invalid Dropped
Display untrusted port with option82 dropped
Display invalid dropped
: Click to clear the statistics.
: Click to refresh the statistics.
244
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.9.7.6 Database Agent
Overview of the DHCP Snooping Database Agent
When DHCP snooping is enabled, the switch uses the DHCP snooping binding database to store information about untrusted interfaces. The database can have up to 8192 bindings.
Each database entry (binding) has an IP address, an associated MAC address, the lease time (in hexadecimal format), the interface to which the binding applies, and the VLAN to which the interface belongs. A checksum value, the end of each entry, is the number of bytes from the start of the file to end of the entry. Each entry is 72 bytes, followed by a space and then the checksum value.
To keep the bindings when the switch reloads, you must use the DHCP snooping database agent. If the agent is disabled, dynamic ARP or IP source guard is enabled, and the DHCP snooping binding database has dynamic bindings, the switch loses its connectivity. If the agent is disabled and only DHCP snooping is enabled, the switch does not lose its connectivity, but DHCP snooping might not prevent DCHP spoofing attacks.
The database agent stores the bindings in a file at a configured location. When reloading, the switch reads the binding file to build the DHCP snooping binding database. The switch keeps the file current by updating it when the database changes.
When a switch learns of new bindings or when it loses bindings, the switch immediately updates the entries in the database.
The switch also updates the entries in the binding file. The frequency at which the file is updated is based on a configurable delay, and the updates are batched. If the file is not updated in a specified time (set by the write-delay and abort-timeout values), the update stops.
The DHCP Snooping Database and Information screens in Figure 4-9-40 & Figure 4-9-41 appear.
Figure 4-9-40 DHCP Snooping Database Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Database Type
File Name
Description
Select database type
The name of file image
245
Remote Server
Write Delay
Timeout
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Fill in your remote server IP address
Specify the duration for which the transfer should be delayed after the binding database changes. The range is from 15 to 86400 seconds. The default is 300 seconds (5 minutes).
Specify when to stop the database transfer process after the binding database changes.
The range is from 0 to 86400. Use 0 for an infinite duration. The default is 300 seconds (5 minutes).
Figure 4-9-41 DHCP Snooping Database Information Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Database Type
File Name
Remote Server
Write Delay
Timeout
Description
Display the current database type
Display the current file name
Display the current remote server
Display the current write delay
Display the current timeout
246
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.9.7.7 Rate Limit
After enabling DHCP snooping, the switch will monitor all the DHCP messages and implement software transmission. The
DHCP Rate Limit Setting and Config screens in Figure 4-9-42 & Figure 4-9-43 appear.
Figure 4-9-42 DHCP Rate Limit Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
State
Rate Limit (pps)
Description
Select port from this drop-down list
Set default or user-define
Configure the rate limit for the port policer. The default value is "unlimited". Valid values are in the range 1 to 300.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes
Figure 4-9-43 DHCP Rate Limit Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
Rate Limit (pps)
Description
The switch port number of the logical port
Display the current rate limit
247
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.9.7.8 Option82 Global Setting
DHCP provides a relay mechanism for sending information about the switch and its DHCP clients to DHCP servers. Known as
DHCP Option 82, it allows compatible DHCP servers to use the information when assigning IP addresses, or to set other services or policies for clients. It is also an effective tool in preventing malicious network attacks from attached clients on DHCP services, such as IP Spoofing, Client Identifier Spoofing, MAC Address Spoofing, and Address Exhaustion.
The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into a DHCP request packets when forwarding client DHCP packets to a DHCP server and remove the specific information from a DHCP reply packets when forwarding server
DHCP packets to a DHCP client. The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other assignment policies. Specifically the option works by setting two sub-options:
Circuit ID (option 1)
Remote ID (option2).
The Circuit ID sub-option is supposed to include information specific to which circuit the request came in on.
The Remote ID sub-option was designed to carry information relating to the remote host end of the circuit.
The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and the format is "vlan_id" "module_id" "port_no". The parameter of
"vlan_id" is the first two bytes represent the VLAN ID. The parameter of "module_id" is the third byte for the module ID (in standalone switch it always equal 0, in switch it means switch ID). The parameter of "port_no" is the fourth byte and it means the port number.
After enabling DHCP snooping, the switch will monitor all the DHCP messages and implement software transmission. The
DHCP Rate Limit Setting and Config screens in Figure 4-9-44 & Figure 4-9-45 appear.
Figure 4-9-44 Option82 Global Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
State
Description
Set the option2 (remote ID option) content of option 82 added by DHCP request packets.
Default means the default VLAN MAC format.
User-Define means the remote-id content of option 82 specified by users
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
248
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-9-45 Option82 Global Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Option82 Remote ID
4.9.7.9 Option82 Port Setting
Description
Display the current option82 remote ID
This function is used to set the retransmitting policy of the system for the received DHCP request message which contains option82.
The
The the server to process
The option 82, and forward the message to the server to process.
Option82 Port Setting screens in Figure 4-9-46 & Figure 4-9-47 appear.
Figure 4-9-46 Option82 Global Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
Enable
Description
Select port from this drop-down list
Enable or disable option82 function on port
249
Allow Untrusted
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Select modes from this drop-down list. The following modes are available:
Drop
Keep
Replace
Figure 4-9-47 Option82 Global Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
Enable
Allow Untrusted
Description
The switch port number of the logical port
Display the current status
Display the current untrusted mode
250
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.9.7.10 Option82 Circuit-ID Setting
Set creation method for option82, users can define the parameters of circuit-id suboption by themselves. Option82 Circuit-ID
Setting screens in Figure 4-9-48 & Figure 4-9-49 appear.
Figure 4-9-48 Option82 Port Circuit-ID Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Buttons
Object
Port
VLAN
Circuit ID
Description
Select port from this drop-down list
Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN
Set the option1 (Circuit ID) content of option 82 added by DHCP request packets
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-9-49 Option82 Port Circuit-ID Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
VLAN
Circuit ID
Description
Display the current port
Display the current VLAN
Display the current circuit ID
251
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.9.8 Dynamic ARP Inspection
Dynamic ARP Inspection (DAI) is a secure feature. Several types of attacks can be launched against a host or devices connected to Layer 2 networks by "poisoning" the ARP caches. This feature is used to block such attacks. Only valid ARP requests and responses can go through DUT. This page provides ARP Inspection related configuration.
A Dynamic ARP prevents the untrusted ARP packets based on the DHCP Snooping Database.
4.9.8.1 Global Setting
DAI Setting and Information screens in Figure 4-9-50 & Figure 4-9-51 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-9-50 DAI Setting Page Screenshot
Buttons
Object
DAI
: Click to apply changes.
Description
Enable the Global Dynamic ARP Inspection or disable the Global ARP Inspection
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-9-51 DAI Information Page Screenshot
Object
DAI
Description
Display the current DAI status
252
4.9.8.2 VLAN Setting
DAI VLAN Setting screens in Figure 4-9-52 & Figure 4-9-53 appear.
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-9-52 DAI VLAN Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
VLAN ID
Status
Description
Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN
Enables Dynamic ARP Inspection on the specified VLAN
Options:
Enable
Disable
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-9-53 DAI VLAN Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
VLAN List
Status
Description
Display the current VLAN list
Display the current status
253
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.9.8.3 Port Setting
Configures switch ports as DAI trusted or untrusted and check mode. DAI Port Setting screens in Figure 4-9-54 & Figure 4-9-55 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-9-54 DAI Port Setting Page Screenshot
Object
Port
Type
Src-Mac Chk
Dst-Mac Chk
IP Chk
Buttons
IP Allow Zero
: Click to apply changes.
Description
Select port from this drop-down list
Specify ARP Inspection is enabled on which ports. Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled, ARP Inspection is enabled on this given port.
Default: All interfaces are untrusted.
Enable or disable to checks the source MAC address in the Ethernet header against the sender MAC address in the ARP body. This check is performed on both ARP requests and responses. When enabled, packets with different MAC addresses are classified as invalid and are dropped.
Enable or disable to checks the destination MAC address in the Ethernet header against the target MAC address in ARP body. This check is performed for ARP responses. When enabled, packets with different MAC addresses are classified as invalid and are dropped.
Enable or disable to checks the source and destination IP addresses of ARP packets. The all-zero, all-one or multicast IP addresses are considered invalid and the corresponding packets are discarded.
Enable or disable to checks all-zero IP addresses.
254
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-9-55 DAI Port Setting Page Screenshot
Object
Port
Type
Src-Mac Chk
Dst-Mac Chk
IP Chk
IP Allow Zero
Description
The switch port number of the logical port
Display the current port type
Display the current Src-Mac Chk status
Display the current Dst-Mac Chk status
Display the current IP Chk status
Display the current IP allow zero status
255
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.9.8.4 Statistics
Configures switch ports as DAI trusted or untrusted and check mode. DAI Port Setting screen in Figure 4-9-56 appears.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-9-56 DAI Port Setting Page Screenshot
Object
Port
Forwarded
Description
The switch port number of the logical port
Display the current forwarded
Source MAC Failures
Display the current source MAC failures
Dest MAC Failures
Display the current source MAC failures
SIP Validation Failures
Display the current SIP Validation failures
DIP Validation Failures
Display the current DIP Validation failures
Buttons
IP-MAC Mismatch
Failures
Display the current IP-MAC mismatch failures
: Click to clear the statistics.
: Click to refresh the statistics.
256
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.9.8.5 Rate Limit
The ARP Rate Limit Setting and Config screens in Figure 4-9-57 & Figure 4-9-58 appear.
Figure 4-9-57 ARP Rate Limit Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Buttons
Object
Port
State
Rate Limit (pps)
: Click to apply changes.
Description
Select port from this drop-down list
Set default or user-define
Configure the rate limit for the port policer. The default value is "unlimited".
Figure 4-9-58 ARP Rate Limit Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
Rate Limit (pps)
Description
The switch port number of the logical port
Display the current rate limit
257
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.9.9 IP Source Guard
IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the
DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings. It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host.
After receiving a packet, the port looks up the key attributes (including IP address, MAC address and VLAN tag) of the packet in the binding entries of the IP source guard. If there is a matching entry, the port will forward the packet. Otherwise, the port will abandon the packet.
IP source guard filters packets based on the following types of binding entries:
IP-port binding entry
MAC-port binding entry
IP-MAC-port binding entry
258
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.9.9.1 Port Settings
IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings. It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host.
The IP Source Guard Port Setting and Information screens in Figure 4-9-60 & Figure 4-9-61 appear.
Figure 4-9-60 IP Source Guard Port Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
Status
Verify Source
Description
Select port from this drop-down list
Enable or disable the IP source guard
Configures the switch to filter inbound traffic based IP address, or IP address and
MAC address.
None Disables IP source guard filtering on the Managed Switch.
IP Enables traffic filtering based on IP addresses stored in the binding table.
IP and MAC Enables traffic filtering based on IP addresses and corresponding MAC addresses stored in the binding table.
The maximum number of IP source guard that can be secured on this port
Buttons
Max Binding Entry
: Click to apply changes.
259
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-9-61 IP Source Guard Port Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
Description
The switch port number of the logical port
Status
Verify Source
Display the current status
Display the current verify source
Max Binding Entry
Display the current max binding entry
Current Binding Entry
Display the current binding entry
260
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.9.9.2 Binding Table
The IP Source Guard Static Binding Entry and Table Status screens in Figure 4-9-62 & Figure 4-9-63 appear.
Figure 4-9-62 IP Source Guard Static Binding Entry Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Description
Select port from this drop-down list
Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN
Sourcing MAC address is allowed
Sourcing IP address is allowed
Buttons
Object
Port
VLAN ID
MAC Address
IP Address
: Click to add authentication list
Figure 4-9-63 IP Source Guard Binding Table Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
VLAN ID
MAC Address
IP Address
Type
Lease Time
Action
Description
Display the current port
Display the current VLAN
Display the current MAC address
Display the current IP Address
Display the current entry type
Display the current lease time
Click to delete IP source guard binding table status entry
261
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.9.10 Port Security
This page allows you to configure the Port Security Limit Control system and port settings. Limit Control allows for limiting the number of users on a given port. A user is identified by a MAC address and VLAN ID. If Limit Control is enabled on a port, the limit specifies the maximum number of users on the port. If this number is exceeded, an action is taken. The action can be one of four different as described below.
The Limit Control module is one of the modules that utilize a lower-layer module while the Port Security module manages MAC addresses learned on the port.
The Limit Control configuration consists of two sections, a system- and a port-wid. The IP Source Guard Static Binding Entry and Table Status screens in Figure 4-9-64 & Figure 4-9-65 appear.
Figure 4-9-64 Port Security Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
Security
Mac L2 Entry
Action
Description
Select port from this drop-down list
Enable or disable the port security
The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be secured on this port. If the limit is exceeded, the corresponding action is taken.
The switch is "born" with a total number of MAC addresses from which all ports draw whenever a new MAC address is seen on a Port Security-enabled port.
Since all ports draw from the same pool, it may happen that a configured maximum cannot be granted, if the remaining ports have already used all available MAC addresses.
If Limit is reached, the switch can take one of the following actions:
Forward: Do not allow more than Limit MAC addresses on the port, but take no further action.
Shutdown: If Limit + 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port, shut down the port. This implies that all secured MAC addresses will be removed from the port, and no new will be learned. Even if the link is physically disconnected
262
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
and reconnected on the port (by disconnecting the cable), the port will remain shut down. There are three ways to re-open the port:
1) Disable and re-enable Limit Control on the port or the switch,
2) Click the Reopen button.
Discard: If Limit + 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port, it will trigger the action that do not learn the new MAC and drop the package.
Figure 4-9-65 Port Security Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port Name
Enable State
L2 Entry Num
Action
Description
The switch port number of the logical port
Display the current per port security status
Display the current L2 entry number
Display the current action
263
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.9.11 DoS
The DoS is short for Denial of Service, which is a simple but effective destructive attack on the internet. The server under DoS attack will drop normal user data packet due to non-stop processing the attacker’s data packet, leading to the denial of the service and worse can lead to leak of sensitive data of the server.
Security feature refers to applications such as protocol check which is for protecting the server from attacks such as DoS. The protocol check allows the user to drop matched packets based on specified conditions. The security features provide several simple and effective protections against Dos attacks while acting no influence on the linear forwarding performance of the switch.
4.9.11.1 Global DoS Setting
The Global DoS Setting and Information screens in Figure 4-9-66 & Figure 4-9-67 appear.
Figure 4-9-66 Global DoS Setting Page Screenshot
264
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Object
DMAC = SMAC
Description
Enable or disable DoS check mode by DMAC = SMAC
Land
UDP Blat
TCP Blat
POD
IPv6 Min Fragment
ICMP Fragments
IPv4 Ping Max Size
Enable or disable DoS check mode by land
Enable or disable DoS check mode by UDP blat
Enable or disable DoS check mode by TCP blat
Enable or disable DoS check mode by POD
Enable or disable DoS check mode by IPv6 min fragment
Enable or disable DoS check mode by ICMP fragment
Enable or disable DoS check mode by IPv4 ping max size
IPv6 Ping Max Size Enable or disable DoS check mode by IPv6 ping max size
Ping Max Size Setting
Set the max size for ping
Smurf Attack
Enable or disable DoS check mode by smurf attack
TCP Min Hdr Size
TCP-SYN (SPORT <
1024)
Null Scan Attack
X-mas Scan Attack
TCP SYN-FIN Attack
TCP SYN-RST Attack
Buttons
TCP Fragment (Offset
= 1)
Enable or disable DoS check mode by TCP min hdr size
Enable or disable DoS check mode by TCP-syn (sport < 1024)
Enable or disable DoS check mode by null scan attack
Enable or disable DoS check mode by x-mas scan attack
Enable or disable DoS check mode by TCP syn-fin attack
Enable or disable DoS check mode by TCP syn-rst attack
Enable or disable DoS check mode by TCP fragment (offset = 1)
: Click to apply changes.
265
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-9-67 DoS Information Page Screenshot
Object
DMAC = SMAC
Land Attach
UDP Blat
TCP Blat
POD
IPv6 Min Fragment
ICMP Fragments
IPv4 Ping Max Size
IPv6 Ping Max Size
Description
Display the current DMAC = SMAC status
Display the current land attach status
Display the current UDP blat status
Display the current TCP blat status
Display the current POD status
Display the current IPv6 min fragment status
Display the current ICMP fragment status
Display the current IPv4 ping max size status
Display the current IPv6 ping max size status
Smurf Attack
TCP Min Header Length
TCP-SYN (SPORT < 1024)
Null Scan Attack
Display the current smurf attack status
Display the current TCP min header length
Display the current TCP syn status
Display the current null scan attack status
X-mas Scan Attack
TCP SYN-FIN Attack
Display the current x-mas scan attack status
Display the current TCP syn-fin attack status
TCP SYN-RST Attack Display the current TCP syn-rst attack status
TCP Fragment (Offset = 1)
Display the TCP fragment (offset = 1) status
266
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.9.11.2 DoS Port Setting
The DoS Port Setting and Status screens in Figure 4-9-68 & Figure 4-9-69 appear.
Figure 4-9-68 Port Security Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Buttons
Object
Port Select
DoS Protection
: Click to apply changes.
Description
Select port from this drop-down list.
Enable or disable per port DoS protection.
Figure 4-9-68 Port Security Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
DoS Protection
Description
The switch port number of the logical port
Display the current DoS protection
267
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.9.12 Storm Control
Storm control for the switch is configured on this Page.
There is an unknown unicast storm rate control, unknown multicast storm rate control, and a broadcast storm rate control.
These only affect flooded frames, i.e. frames with a (VLAN ID, DMAC) pair not present on the MAC Address table.
4.9.12.1 Global Setting
The Storm Control Global Setting and Information screens in Figure 4-9-69 & Figure 4-9-70 appear.
Figure 4-9-69 Storm Control Global Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Unit
Buttons
Preamble & IFG
: Click to apply changes.
Description
Controls the unit of measure for the storm control rate as "pps" or "bps". The default value is "bps".
Set the excluded or included interframe gap
Figure 4-9-70 Storm Control Global Information Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Unit
Preamble & IFG
Description
Display the current unit
Display the current preamble & IFG
268
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.9.12.2 Port Setting
Storm control for the switch is configured on this page. There are three types of storm rate control:
Broadcast storm rate control
Unknown Unicast storm rate control
Unknown Multicast storm rate control
The configuration indicates the permitted packet rate for unknown unicast, unknown multicast, or broadcast traffic across the switch. The Storm Control Configuration screens in Figure 4-9-71 & Figure 4-9-72 appear.
Figure 4-9-71 Storm Control Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
Port State
Action
Type Enable
Buttons
Rate (kbps/pps)
: Click to apply changes
Description
Select port from this drop-down list.
Enable or disable the storm control status for the given storm type.
Configures the action performed when storm control is over rate on a port. Valid values are Shutdown or Drop.
The settings in a particular row apply to the frame type listed here:
broadcast
unknown unicast
unknown multicast
Configure the rate for the storm control. The default value is "10,000".
269
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-9-72 Storm Control Information Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
Description
The switch port number of the logical port
Port State
Display the current port state
Broadcast (Kbps/pps)
Display the current broadcast storm control rate
Unknown Multicast
(Kbps/pps)
Unknown Unicast
(Kbps/pps)
Action
Display the current unknown multicast storm control rate
Display the current unknown unicast storm control rate
Display the current action
270
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.10 ACL
ACL is an acronym for Access Control List. It is the list table of ACEs, containing access control entries that specify individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects, such as a process or a program. Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL. The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object access rights.
ACL implementations can be quite complex, for example, when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation. In networking, the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server, each with a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service. ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic, and in this context, they are similar to firewalls.
ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry. It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID.
There are three ACE frame types (Ethernet Type, ARP, and IPv4) and two ACE actions (permit and deny). The ACE also contains many detailed, different parameter options that are available for individual application.
The ACL page contains links to the following main topics:
MAC-based ACL
MAC-based ACE
IPv4-based ACL
IPv4-based ACE
IPv6-based ACL
IPv6-based ACE
ACL Binding
Configuration MAC-based ACL setting
Add / Edit / Delete the MAC-based ACE (Access Control Entry) setting
Configuration IPv4-based ACL setting
Add / Edit / Delete the IPv4-based ACE (Access Control Entry) setting
Configuration IPv6-based ACL setting
Add / Edit / Delete the IPv6-based ACE (Access Control Entry) setting
Configure the ACL parameters (ACE) of each switch port.
271
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.10.1 MAC-based ACL
This page shows the ACL status by different ACL users. Each row describes the ACE that is defined. It is a conflict if a specific
ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations. MAC-based ACL screens in Figure 4-10-1 & Figure 4-10-2 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-10-1 MAC-based ACL Page Screenshot
Object
ACL Name
ACL Table
Description
Create a named MAC-based ACL list
Figure 4-10-2 ACL Table Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Delete
Description
Click to delete ACL name entry
272
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.10.2 MAC-based ACE
An ACE consists of several parameters. Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type that you selected. The MAC-based ACE screen in Figure 4-10-3 & Figure 4-10-4 appears.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-10-3 MAC-based ACE Page Screenshot
Object
ACL Name
Sequence
Action
DA MAC
Description
Select ACL name from this drop-down list
Set the ACL sequence
Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE.
Permit: Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned.
Deny: Frames matching the ACE are dropped.
Shutdown: Port shutdown is disabled for the ACE.
Specify the destination MAC filter for this ACE.
Any: No DA MAC filter is specified.
273
DA MAC Value
DA MAC Mask
SA MAC
SA MAC Value
SA MAC Mask
VLAN ID
802.1p
802.1p Value
802.1p Mask
Buttons
EtherType
(Range:0x05DD –
0xFFFF)
: Click to add ACE list.
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
User Defined: If you want to filter a specific destination MAC address with this ACE, choose this value. A field for entering a DA MAC value appears.
When "User Defined" is selected for the DA MAC filter, you can enter a specific destination MAC address. The legal format is "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx". A frame that hits this ACE matches this DA MAC value.
Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender hardware address field (SHA) settings.
0
: ARP frames where SHA is not equal to the DA MAC address.
1
: ARP frames where SHA is equal to the DA MAC address.
Specify the source MAC filter for this ACE.
Any: No SA MAC filter is specified.
User Defined: If you want to filter a specific source MAC address with this
ACE, choose this value. A field for entering a SA MAC value appears.
When "User Defined" is selected for the SA MAC filter, you can enter a specific source MAC address. The legal format is "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx". A frame that hits this ACE matches this SA MAC value.
Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender hardware address field (SHA) settings.
0
: ARP frames where SHA is not equal to the SA MAC address.
1
: ARP frames where SHA is equal to the SA MAC address.
Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN
Include or exclude the 802.1p value
Set the 802.1p value
0
: where frame is not equal to the 802.1p value.
1
: where frame is equal to the 802.1p value.
You can enter a specific EtherType value. The allowed range is 0x05DD to
0xFFFF. A frame that hits this ACE matches this EtherType value.
Figure 4-10-4 MAC-based ACE Table Page Screenshot
274
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Object
ACL Name
Sequence
Action
802.1p Mask
EtherType
Modify
Description
Display the current ACL name
Display the current sequence
Display the current action
Destination MAC Address
Destination MAC Address
Mask
Source MAC Address
Display the current destination MAC address
Display the current destination MAC address mask
Display the current source MAC address
Source MAC Address Mask
Display the current source MAC address mask
VLAN ID
802.1p
Display the current VLAN ID
Display the current 802.1p value
Display the current 802.1p mask
Display the current Ethernet type
Click to edit MAC-based ACL parameter
Click to delete MAC-based ACL entry
275
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.10.3 IPv4-based ACL
This page shows the ACL status by different ACL users. Each row describes the ACE that is defined. It is a conflict if a specific
ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations. IPv4-based ACL screens in Figure 4-10-5 & Figure 4-10-6 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-10-5 IPv4-based ACL Page Screenshot
Buttons
Object
ACL Name
: Click to add ACL name list.
Description
Create a named IPv4-based ACL list
Figure 4-10-6 ACL Table Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Delete
Description
Click to delete ACL name entry.
276
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.10.4 IPv4-based ACE
An ACE consists of several parameters. Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type that you selected. The IPv4-based ACE screens in Figure 4-10-7 & Figure 4-10-8 appear.
Figure 4-10-7 IP-based ACE Page Screenshot
277
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Object
ACL Name
Description
Select ACL name from this drop-down list.
Sequence
Set the ACL sequence.
Action
Protocol
Source IP Address
Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE.
Permit: Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned.
Deny: Frames matching the ACE are dropped.
Shutdown: Port shutdown is disabled for the ACE..
Specify the protocol filter for this ACE.
Any(IP): No protocol filter is specified.
Select from list: If you want to filter a specific protocol with this ACE, choose this value and select protocol from this drop-down list.
Protocol ID to match: If you want to filter a specific protocol with this ACE, choose this value and set current protocol ID.
Specify the Source IP address filter for this ACE.
Any: No source IP address filter is specified.
User Defined: If you want to filter a specific source IP address with this ACE, choose this value. A field for entering a source IP address value appears.
Source IP Address
Value
Destination IP Address
Value
When "User Defined" is selected for the source IP address filter, you can enter a specific source IP address. The legal format is "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx". A frame that hits this ACE matches this source IP address value.
Source IP Wildcard
Mask
When "User Defined" is selected for the source IP filter, you can enter a specific
SIP mask in dotted decimal notation.
Destination IP Address
Specify the Destination IP address filter for this ACE.
Any: No destination IP address filter is specified.
User Defined: If you want to filter a specific destination IP address with this
ACE, choose this value. A field for entering a source IP address value appears.
When "User Defined" is selected for the destination IP address filter, you can enter a specific destination IP address. The legal format is "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx". A frame that hits this ACE matches this destination IP address value.
Destination IP
Wildcard Mask
Source Port
When "User Defined" is selected for the destination IP filter, you can enter a specific DIP mask in dotted decimal notation.
Specify the source port for this ACE.
Any: No specific source port is specified (source port status is "don't-care").
Single: If you want to filter a specific source port with this ACE, you can enter a specific source port value. A field for entering a source port value appears. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this ACE
278
Destination Port
TCP Flags
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
matches this source port value.
Range: If you want to filter a specific source port range filter with this ACE, you can enter a specific source port range value. A field for entering a source port value appears. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this
ACE matches this source port value.
Specify the destination port for this ACE.
Any: No specific destination port is specified (destination port status is
"don't-care").
Single: If you want to filter a specific destination port with this ACE, you can enter a specific destination port value. A field for entering a destination port value appears. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this ACE matches this destination port value.
Range: If you want to filter a specific destination port range filter with this
ACE, you can enter a specific destination port range value. A field for entering a destination port value appears.
UGR Specify the TCP "Urgent Pointer field significant" (URG) value for this
ACK
PSH
RST
ACE.
Set: TCP frames where the URG field is set must be able to match this entry.
Unset: TCP frames where the URG field is set must not be able to match this entry.
Don’t Care: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Specify the TCP "Acknowledgment field significant" (ACK) value for this
ACE.
Set: TCP frames where the ACK field is set must be able to match this entry.
Unset: TCP frames where the ACK field is set must not be able to match this entry.
Don’t Care: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Specify the TCP "Push Function" (PSH) value for this ACE.
Set: TCP frames where the PSH field is set must be able to match this entry.
Unset: TCP frames where the PSH field is set must not be able to match this entry.
Don’t Care: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Specify the TCP "Reset the connection" (RST) value for this ACE.
Set: TCP frames where the RST field is set must be able to match this entry.
Unset: TCP frames where the RST field is set must not be able to match this entry.
279
Type of Service
ICMP
ICMP Code
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
SYN
FIN
Don’t Care: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Specify the TCP "Synchronize sequence numbers" (SYN) value for this
ACE.
Set: TCP frames where the SYN field is set must be able to match this entry.
Unset: TCP frames where the SYN field is set must not be able to match this entry.
Don’t Care: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Specify the TCP "No more data from sender" (FIN) value for this ACE.
Set: TCP frames where the FIN field is set must be able to match this entry.
Unset: TCP frames where the FIN field is set must not be able to match this entry.
Don’t Care: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Specify the type of service for this ACE.
Any: No specific type of service is specified (destination port status is
"don't-care").
DSCP: If you want to filter a specific DSCP with this ACE, you can enter a specific DSCP value. A field for entering a DSCP value appears. The allowed range is 0 to 63. A frame that hits this ACE matches this DSCP value.
IP Precedence: If you want to filter a specific IP precedence with this ACE, you can enter a specific IP precedence value. A field for entering an IP precedence value appears. The allowed range is 0 to 7. A frame that hits this
ACE matches this IP precedence value.
Specify the ICMP for this ACE.
Any: No specific ICMP is specified (destination port status is "don't-care").
List: If you want to filter a specific list with this ACE, you can select a specific list value.
Protocol ID: If you want to filter a specific protocol ID filter with this ACE, you can enter a specific protocol ID value. A field for entering a protocol ID value appears. The allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this protocol ID value.
Specify the ICMP code filter for this ACE.
Any: No ICMP code filter is specified (ICMP code filter status is
"don't-care").
User Defined: If you want to filter a specific ICMP code filter with this
ACE, you can enter a specific ICMP code value. A field for entering an
ICMP code value appears. The allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP code value.
280
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Buttons
: Click to add ACE list.
Figure 4-10-8 IPv4-based ACE Table Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
ACL Name
Sequence
Description
Display the current ACL name
Display the current sequence
Action
Protocol
Source IP Address
Display the current action
Display the current protocol
Display the current source IP address
Source IP Address
Wildcard Mask
Display the current source IP address wildcard mask
Destination IP Address
Display the current destination IP address
Destination IP Address
Wildcard Mask
Source Port Range
Display the current destination IP address wildcard mask
Display the current source port range
Destination Port
Range
Flag Set
DSCP
IP Precedence
ICMP Type
ICMP Code
Modify
Display the current destination port range
Display the current flag set
Display the current DSCP
Display the current IP precedence
Display the current ICMP Type
Display the current ICMP code
Click to edit IPv4-based ACL parameter
Click to delete IPv4-based ACL entry
281
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.10.5 IPv6-based ACL
This page shows the ACL status by different ACL users. Each row describes the ACE that is defined. It is a conflict if a specific
ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations. IPv6-based ACL screens in Figure 4-10-9 & Figure 4-10-10 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-10-9 IPv6-based ACL Page Screenshot
Buttons
Object
ACL Name
: Click to add ACL name list.
Description
Create a named IPv6-based ACL list
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-10-10 ACL Table Page Screenshot
Object
Delete
Description
Click to delete ACL name entry
282
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.10.6 IPv6-based ACE
An ACE consists of several parameters. Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type that you selected. The IPv6-based ACE screens in Figure 4-10-11 & Figure 4-10-12 appear.
Figure 4-10-11 IP-based ACE Page Screenshot
283
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Object
ACL Name
Description
Select ACL name from this drop-down list
Sequence
Set the ACL sequence
Action
Protocol
Source IP Address
Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE
Permit: Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned.
Deny: Frames matching the ACE are dropped.
Shutdown: Port shutdown is disabled for the ACE.
Specify the protocol filter for this ACE
Any (IP): No protocol filter is specified.
Select from list: If you want to filter a specific protocol with this ACE, choose this value and select protocol from this drop-down list.
Specify the Source IP address filter for this ACE
Any: No source IP address filter is specified.
User Defined: If you want to filter a specific source IP address with this ACE, choose this value. A field for entering a source IP address value appears.
Source IP Address
Value
Destination IP Address
Value
When "User Defined" is selected for the source IP address filter, you can enter a specific source IP address. The legal format is "xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx: xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx". A frame that hits this ACE matches this source IP address value.
Source IP Prefix
Length
When "User Defined" is selected for the source IP filter, you can enter a specific
SIP prefix length in dotted decimal notation.
Destination IP Address
Specify the Destination IP address filter for this ACE.
Any: No destination IP address filter is specified.
User Defined: If you want to filter a specific destination IP address with this
ACE, choose this value. A field for entering a source IP address value appears.
When "User Defined" is selected for the destination IP address filter, you can enter a specific destination IP address. The legal format is " xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx: xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx ". A frame that hits this ACE matches this destination IP address value.
Destination IP Prefix
Length
Source Port
When "User Defined" is selected for the destination IP filter, you can enter a specific DIP prefix length in dotted decimal notation.
Specify the source port for this ACE.
Any: No specific source port is specified (source port status is "don't-care").
Single: If you want to filter a specific source port with this ACE, you can enter a specific source port value. A field for entering a source port value appears. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this ACE
284
Destination Port
TCP Flags
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
matches this source port value.
Range: If you want to filter a specific source port range filter with this ACE, you can enter a specific source port range value. A field for entering a source port value appears. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this
ACE matches this source port value.
Specify the destination port for this ACE.
Any: No specific destination port is specified (destination port status is
"don't-care").
Single: If you want to filter a specific destination port with this ACE, you can enter a specific destination port value. A field for entering a destination port value appears. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this ACE matches this destination port value.
Range: If you want to filter a specific destination port range filter with this
ACE, you can enter a specific destination port range value. A field for entering a destination port value appears.
UGR Specify the TCP "Urgent Pointer field significant" (URG) value for this
ACK
PSH
RST
ACE.
Set: TCP frames where the URG field is set must be able to match this entry.
Unset: TCP frames where the URG field is set must not be able to match this entry.
Don’t Care: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Specify the TCP "Acknowledgment field significant" (ACK) value for this
ACE.
Set: TCP frames where the ACK field is set must be able to match this entry.
Unset: TCP frames where the ACK field is set must not be able to match this entry.
Don’t Care: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Specify the TCP "Push Function" (PSH) value for this ACE.
Set: TCP frames where the PSH field is set must be able to match this entry.
Unset: TCP frames where the PSH field is set must not be able to match this entry.
Don’t Care: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Specify the TCP "Reset the connection" (RST) value for this ACE.
Set: TCP frames where the RST field is set must be able to match this entry.
Unset: TCP frames where the RST field is set must not be able to match this entry.
285
Type of Service
ICMP
ICMP Code
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
SYN
FIN
Don’t Care: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Specify the TCP "Synchronize sequence numbers" (SYN) value for this
ACE.
Set: TCP frames where the SYN field is set must be able to match this entry.
Unset: TCP frames where the SYN field is set must not be able to match this entry.
Don’t Care: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Specify the TCP "No more data from sender" (FIN) value for this ACE.
Set: TCP frames where the FIN field is set must be able to match this entry.
Unset: TCP frames where the FIN field is set must not be able to match this entry.
Don’t Care: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Specify the type of service for this ACE.
Any: No specific type of service is specified (destination port status is
"don't-care").
DSCP: If you want to filter a specific DSCP with this ACE, you can enter a specific DSCP value. A field for entering a DSCP value appears. The allowed range is 0 to 63. A frame that hits this ACE matches this DSCP value.
IP Precedence: If you want to filter a specific IP precedence with this ACE, you can enter a specific IP precedence value. A field for entering an IP precedence value appears. The allowed range is 0 to 7. A frame that hits this
ACE matches this IP precedence value.
Specify the ICMP for this ACE.
Any: No specific ICMP is specified (destination port status is "don't-care").
List: If you want to filter a specific list with this ACE, you can select a specific list value.
Protocol ID: If you want to filter a specific protocol ID filter with this ACE, you can enter a specific protocol ID value. A field for entering a protocol ID value appears. The allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this protocol ID value.
Specify the ICMP code filter for this ACE.
Any: No ICMP code filter is specified (ICMP code filter status is "don't-care").
User Defined: If you want to filter a specific ICMP code filter with this ACE, you can enter a specific ICMP code value. A field for entering an ICMP code value appears. The allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP code value.
286
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Buttons
: Click to add ACE list
Figure 4-10-12 IPv6-based ACE Table Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
ACL Name
Sequence
Action
Protocol
Source IP Address
Description
Display the current ACL name
Display the current sequence
Display the current action
Display the current protocol
Display the current source IP address
Source IP Address
Wildcard Mask
Destination IP Address
Display the current destination IP address
Destination IP Address
Display the current destination IP address wildcard mask
Wildcard Mask
Source Port Range
Display the current source port range
Destination Port
Range
Display the current destination port range
Flag Set
DSCP
IP Precedence
Display the current source IP address wildcard mask
Display the current flag set
Display the current DSCP
Display the current IP precedence
ICMP Type
ICMP Code
Display the current ICMP Type
Display the current ICMP code
Modify
Click to edit IPv6-based ACL parameter.
Click to delete IPv6-based ACL entry.
287
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.10.7 ACL Binding
This page allows you to bind the Policy content to the appropriate ACLs. The ACL Policy screens in Figure 4-10-13 & Figure
4-10-14 appears.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-10-13 ACL Binding Page Screenshot
Buttons
Object
Binding Port
ACL Select
: Click to apply changes.
Description
Select port from this drop-down list
Select ACL list from this drop-down list
Figure 4-10-14 ACL Binding Table Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
MAC ACL
IPv4 ACL
IPv6 ACL
Modify
Description
The switch port number of the logical port
Display the current MAC ACL
Display the current IPv4 ACL
Display the current IPv6 ACL
Click to edit ACL binding table parameter
Click to delete ACL binding entry
288
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.11 MAC Address Table
Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame. The Managed Switch builds up a table that maps
MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to (based upon the DMAC address in the frame).
This table contains both static and dynamic entries. The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports.
The frames also contain a MAC address (SMAC address), which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame.
The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses. Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address has been seen after a configurable age time.
289
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.11.1 Static MAC Setting
The static entries in the MAC table are shown in this table. The MAC table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by MAC address.
The Static MAC Setting screens in Figure 4-11-1 & Figure 4-11-2 appear.
Figure 4-11-1 Statics MAC Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Description
Physical address associated with this interface
Select VLAN from this drop-down list
Select port from this drop-down list
Buttons
Object
MAC Address
VLAN
Port
: Click to add new static MAC address.
Figure 4-11-2 Statics MAC Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
No.
MAC Address
VLAN
Port
Delete
Description
This is the number for entries
The MAC address for the entry
The VLAN ID for the entry
Display the current port
Click to delete static MAC status entry
290
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.11.2 MAC Filtering
By filtering MAC address, the switch can easily filter the per-configured MAC address and reduce the un-safety. The Static MAC
Setting screens in Figure 4-11-3 & Figure 4-11-4 appear.
Figure 4-11-3 MAC Filtering Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Description
Physical address associated with this interface
Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN
Buttons
Object
MAC Address
VLAN (1~4096)
: Click to add new MAC filtering setting.
Figure 4-11-4 Statics MAC Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
No.
MAC Address
VLAN
Delete
Description
This is the number for entries
The MAC address for the entry
The VLAN ID for the entry
Click to delete static MAC status entry.
291
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.11.3 Dynamic Address Setting
By default, dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table after 300 seconds. The Dynamic Address Setting/Status screens in Figure 4-11-5 & Figure 4-11-6 appear.
Figure 4-11-5 Dynamic Addresses Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Aging Time
Description
The time after which a learned entry is discarded
Range: 10-630 seconds;
Default: 300 seconds
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-11-6 Dynamic Addresses Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Aging Time
Description
Display the current aging time
292
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.11.4 Dynamic Learned
Dynamic MAC Table
Dynamic Learned MAC Table is shown on this page. The MAC Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by MAC address. The
Dynamic Learned screens in Figure 4-11-6 & Figure 4-11-7 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-11-6 Dynamic Learned Page Screenshot
Buttons
Object
Port
VLAN
MAC Address
Description
Select port from this drop-down list
Select VLAN from this drop-down list
Physical address associated with this interface
: Refreshes the displayed table starting from the "Start from MAC address" and "VLAN" input fields
: Flushes all dynamic entries
Figure 4-11-7 MAC Address Information Page Screenshot
293
Buttons
Object
MAC Address
VLAN
Type
Port
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Description
The MAC address of the entry
The VLAN ID of the entry
Indicates whether the entry is a static or dynamic entry
The ports that are members of the entry
: Click to add dynamic MAC address to static MAC address.
294
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.12 LLDP
4.12.1 Link Layer Discovery Protocol
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) is used to discover basic information about neighboring devices on the local broadcast domain. LLDP is a Layer 2 protocol that uses periodic broadcasts to advertise information about the sending device. Advertised information is represented in Type Length Value (TLV) format according to the IEEE 802.1ab standard, and can include details such as device identification, capabilities and configuration settings. LLDP also defines how to store and maintain information gathered about the neighboring network nodes it discovers.
Link Layer Discovery Protocol - Media Endpoint Discovery (LLDP-MED) is an extension of LLDP intended for managing endpoint devices such as Voice over IP phones and network switches. The LLDP-MED TLVs advertise information such as network policy, power, inventory, and device location details. LLDP and LLDP-MED information can be used by SNMP applications to simplify troubleshooting, enhance network management, and maintain an accurate network topology.
295
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.12.2 LLDP Global Setting
This Page allows the user to inspect and configure the current LLDP port settings. The LLDP Global Setting and Config screens in Figure 4-12-1 & Figure 4-12-2 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-12-1 Global Setting Page Screenshot
Object
Enable
Description
Globally enable or disable LLDP function
LLDP PDU Disable
Set LLDP PDU disable action: include “Filtering”, “Bridging” and “Flooding”.
Action
Filtering: discrad all LLDP PDU.
Bridging: transmit LLDP PDU in the same VLAN.
Flooding: transmit LLDP PDU for all port.
Transmission Interval
The switch is periodically transmitting LLDP frames to its neighbors for having the network discovery information up-to-date. The interval between each LLDP frame is determined by the Transmission Interval value. Valid values are restricted to 5 - 32768 seconds.
Default: 30 seconds
Holdtime Multiplier
This attribute must comply with the following rule:
(Transmission Interval * Hold Time Multiplier) ≤65536, and Transmission Interval
>= (4 * Delay Interval)
Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the information in the
LLDP frame shall be considered valid. The LLDP information valid period is set to
Holdtime multiplied by Transmission Interval seconds. Valid values are restricted to 2 - 10 times.
296
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Reinitialization Delay
Transmit Delay
TTL in seconds is based on the following rule:
(Transmission Interval * Holdtime Multiplier) ≤ 65536.
Therefore, the default TTL is 4*30 = 120 seconds.
When a port is disabled, LLDP is disabled or the switch is rebooted a LLDP shutdown frame is transmitted to the neighboring units, signaling that the LLDP information isn't valid anymore. Tx Reinit controls the amount of seconds between the shutdown frame and a new LLDP initialization. Valid values are restricted to 1 - 10 seconds.
If some configuration is changed (e.g. the IP address) a new LLDP frame is transmitted, but the time between the LLDP frames will always be at least the value of Transmit Delay seconds. Transmit Delay cannot be larger than 1/4 of the Transmission Interval value. Valid values are restricted to 1 - 8192 seconds.
Buttons
LLDP-MED Fast Start
Repeat Count
This attribute must comply with the rule:
(4 * Delay Interval) ≤Transmission Interval
Configures the amount of LLDP MED Fast Start LLDPDUs to transmit during the activation process of the LLDP-MED Fast Start mechanism.
Range: 1-10 packets;
Default: 3 packets
The MED Fast Start Count parameter is part of the timer which ensures that the
LLDP-MED Fast Start mechanism is active for the port. LLDP-MED Fast Start is critical to the timely startup of LLDP, and therefore integral to the rapid availability of Emergency Call Service.
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-12-2 LLDP Global Config Page Screenshot
297
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Object
LLDP Enable
LLDP PDU Disable
Action
Description
Display the current LLDP status
Display the current LLDP PDU disable action
Transmission Interval
Display the current transmission interval
Holdtime Multiplier
Display the current holdtime multiplier
Reinitialization Delay
Transmit Delay
Display the current reinitialization delay
Display the current transmit delay
LLDP-MED Fast Start
Repeat Count
Display the current LLDP-MED Fast Start Repeat Count
4.12.3 LLDP Port Setting
Use the LLDP Port Setting to specify the message attributes for individual interfaces, including whether messages are transmitted, received, or both transmitted and received. The LLDP Port Configuration and Status screens in Figure 4-12-3 &
Figure 4-12-4 appear.
Figure 4-12-3 LLDP Port Configuration and Optional TLVs Selection Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port Select
State
Description
Select port from this drop-down list
Enables LLDP messages transmit and receive modes for LLDP Protocol Data
Units. Options:
298
Buttons
Port Select
Optional TLV Select
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
■
Tx only
■
Rx only
■
TxRx
■
Disabled
Select port from this drop-down list
Configures the information included in the TLV field of advertised messages.
System Name: When checked the "System Name" is included in LLDP information transmitted.
Port Description: When checked the "Port Description" is included in
LLDP information transmitted.
System Description: When checked the "System Description" is included in LLDP information transmitted.
System Capability: When checked the "System Capability" is included in LLDP information transmitted.
802.3 MAC-PHY: When checked the "802.3 MAC-PHY" is included in
LLDP information transmitted.
802.3 Link Aggregation: When checked the "802.3 Link Aggregation" is included in LLDP information transmitted.
802.3 Maximum Frame Size: When checked the "802.3 Maximum
Frame Size" is included in LLDP information transmitted.
Management Address: When checked the "Management Address" is included in LLDP information transmitted.
802.1 PVID: When checked the "802.1 PVID" is included in LLDP information transmitted.
: Click to apply changes
Figure 4-12-4 LLDP Port Status Page Screenshot
299
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
State
Selected Optional
TLVs
Description
The switch port number of the logical port
Display the current LLDP status
Display the current selected optional TLVs
The VLAN Name TLV VLAN Selection and LLDP Port VLAN TLV Status screens in Figure 4-12-5 & Figure 4-12-6 appear.
Figure 4-12-5 VLAN Name TLV Selection Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Buttons
Object
Port Select
VLAN Select
: Click to apply changes.
Description
Select port from this drop-down list.
Select VLAN from this drop-down list.
Figure 4-12-6 LLDP Port VLAN TLV Status Page Screenshot
300
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
Selected VLAN
Description
The switch port number of the logical port
Display the current selected VLAN
4.12.4 LLDP Local Device
Use the LLDP Local Device Information screen to display information about the switch, such as its MAC address, chassis ID,
management IP address, and port information. The Local Device Summary and Port Status screens in Figure 4-12-7 &
Figure 4-12-8 appear.
Figure 4-12-7 Local Device Summary Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Chassis ID Subtype
Chassis ID
Capabilities Enabled
Port ID Subtype
Description
Display the current chassis ID subtype
Display the current chassis ID
System Name
System Description
Display the current system name
Display the current system description
Capabilities Supported
Display the current capabilities supported
Display the current capabilities enabled
Display the current port ID subtype
301
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-12-8 Port Status Page Screenshot
Object
Interface
LLDP Status
LLDP MED Status
Description
The switch port number of the logical port.
Display the current LLDP status
Display the current LLDP MED Status
302
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.12.5 LLDP Remove Device
This page provides a status overview for all LLDP remove devices. The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an
LLDP neighbor is detected. The LLDP Remove Device screen in Figure 4-12-9 appears.
Figure 4-12-9 LLDP Remote Device Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Description
Display the current local port
Display the current chassis ID subtype
The Chassis ID is the identification of the neighbor's LLDP frames
Display the current port ID subtype
The Remote Port ID is the identification of the neighbor port
System Name is the name advertised by the neighbor unit
Display the current time to live
Buttons
Object
Local Port
Chassis ID Subtype
Chassis ID
Port ID Subtype
Port ID
System Name
Time to Live
: Click to delete LLDP remove device entry.
: Click to refresh LLDP remove device.
303
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.12.6 MED Network Policy
Network Policy Discovery enables the efficient discovery and diagnosis of mismatch issues with the VLAN configuration, along with the associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes, which apply for a set of specific protocol applications on that port. Improper network policy configurations are a very significant issue in VoIP environments that frequently result in voice quality degradation or loss of service.
Policies are only intended for use with applications that have specific 'real-time’ network policy requirements, such as interactive voice and/or video services.
The network policy attributes advertised are:
1. Layer 2 VLAN ID (IEEE 802.1Q-2003)
2. Layer 2 priority value (IEEE 802.1D-2004)
3. Layer 3 Diffserv code point (DSCP) value (IETF RFC 2474)
This network policy is potentially advertised and associated with multiple sets of application types supported on a given port.
The application types specifically addressed are:
1. Voice
2. Guest Voice
3. Softphone Voice
4. Video Conferencing
5. Streaming Video
6. Control / Signaling (conditionally support a separate network policy for the media types above)
A large network may support multiple VoIP policies across the entire organization, and different policies per application type.
LLDP-MED allows multiple policies to be advertised per port, each corresponding to a different application type. Different ports on the same Network Connectivity Device may advertise different sets of policies, based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration.
It should be noted that LLDP-MED is not intended to run on links other than between Network Connectivity Devices and
Endpoints, and therefore does not need to advertise the multitude of network policies that frequently run on an aggregated link interior to the LAN.
The Voice Auto Mode Configuration, Network Policy Configuration and LLDP MED Network Policy Table screen in Figure
4-12-10 & Figure 4-12-11 appears.
304
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-12-10 Voice Auto Mode Configuration and Network Policy Configuration Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
LLDP MED Policy for
Voice Application
Network Policy
Number
Application Type
Description
Set the LLDP MED policy for voice application mode
Select network policy number from this drop-down list
Intended use of the application types:
Voice - for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services. These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications.
Voice Signaling - for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media. This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Voice application policy.
Guest Voice - support a separate 'limited feature-set' voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services.
Guest Voice Signaling - for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media. This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as
305
VLAN ID
Tag
L2 Priority
DSCP
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
those advertised in the Guest Voice application policy.
Softphone Voice - for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices, such as PCs or laptops. This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple VLANs, if at all, and are typically configured to use an 'untagged’
VLAN or a single 'tagged’ data specific VLAN. When a network policy is defined for use with an 'untagged’ VLAN (see Tagged flag below), then the L2 priority field is ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance.
Video Conferencing - for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real-time interactive video/audio services.
App Streaming Video - for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment. Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type.
Video Signaling - for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media. This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Video
Conferencing application policy.
VLAN identifier (VID) for the port as defined in IEEE 802.1Q-2003
Tag indicating whether the specified application type is using a 'tagged’ or an
'untagged’ VLAN.
Untagged indicates that the device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003. In this case, both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority fields are ignored and only the
DSCP value has relevance.
Tagged indicates that the device is using the IEEE 802.1Q tagged frame format, and that both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority values are being used, as well as the DSCP value. The tagged format includes an additional field, known as the tag header. The tagged frame format also includes priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003.
L2 Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type. L2
Priority may specify one of eight priority levels (0 through 7), as defined by IEEE
802.1D-2004. A value of 0 represents use of the default priority as defined in
IEEE 802.1D-2004.
DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474. DSCP may contain one of 64 code point values (0 through 63). A value of 0 represents use of the default
306
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475.
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-12-11 LLDP MED Network Policy Table Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Buttons
Object
Network Policy
Number
Application
VLAN ID
VLAN Tag
L2 Priority
DSCP Value
Description
Display the current network policy number
Display the current application
Display the current VLAN ID
Display the current VLAN tag status
Display the current L2 priority
Display the current DSCP value
: Click to delete LLDP MED network policy table entry.
307
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.12.7 MED Port Setting
The Port LLDP MED Configuration/Port Setting Table screens in Figure 4-12-12 & Figure 4-12-13 appear.
Figure 4-12-12 Port LLDP MED Configuration Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port Select
MED Enable
MED Optional TVLs
Description
Select port from this drop-down list
Enable or disable MED configuration
Configures the information included in the MED TLV field of advertised messages.
-Network Policy – This option advertises network policy configuration information, aiding in the discovery and diagnosis of VLAN configuration mismatches on a port. Improper network policy configurations frequently result in voice quality degradation or complete service disruption.
-Location – This option advertises location identification details.
-Inventory – This option advertises device details useful for inventory management, such as manufacturer, model, software version and other pertinent information.
Select MED network policy from this drop-down list
Buttons
MED Network Policy
: Click to apply changes.
308
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-12-13 Port LLDP MED Configuration Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Interface
LLDP MED Status
Active
Application
Location
Inventory
Description
The switch port number of the logical port
Display the current LLDP MED status
Display the current active status
Display the current application
Display the current location
Display the current inventory
The MED Location Configuration and LLDP MED Port Location Table screens in Figure 4-12-14 & Figure 4-12-15 appear.
Figure 4-12-14 Port LLDP MED Configuration Page Screenshot
309
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Buttons
Object
Port
Location Coordinate
Location Civic
Address
Location ESC ELIN
: Click to apply changes.
Description
Select port from this drop-down list
A string identifying the Location Coordinate that this entry should belong to
A string identifying the Location Civic Address that this entry should belong to
A string identifying the Location ESC ELIN that this entry should belong to
Figure 4-12-15 LLDP MED Port Location Table Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
Coordinate
Civic Address
ESC ELIN
Description
The switch port number of the logical port
Display the current coordinate
Display the current civic address
Display the current ESC ELIN
310
4.12.8 LLDP Overloading
The LLDP Port Overloading screen in Figure 4-12-16 appears.
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-12-16 LLDP Port Overloading Table Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Interface
Total (Bytes)
Left to Send (Bytes)
Status
Mandatory TLVs
MED Capabilities
MED Location
MED Network Policy
MED Extended Power
via MDI
802.3 TLVs
Description
The switch port number of the logical port
Total number of bytes of LLDP information that is normally sent in a packet
Total number of available bytes that can also send LLDP information in a packet
Gives the status of the TLVs
Displays if the mandatory group of TLVs were transmitted or overloaded
Displays if the capabilities packets were transmitted or overloaded
Displays if the location packets were transmitted or overloaded
Displays if the network policies packets were transmitted or overloaded
Displays if the extended power via MDI packets were transmitted or overloaded
Displays if the 802.3 TLVs were transmitted or overloaded
311
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Optional TLVs
MED Inventory
802.1 TLVs
If the LLDP MED extended power via MDI packets were sent, or if they were overloaded
Displays if the mandatory group of TLVs was transmitted or overloaded
Displays if the 802.1 TLVs were transmitted or overloaded
4.12.9 LLDP Statistics
Use the LLDP Device Statistics screen to general statistics for LLDP-capable devices attached to the switch, and for LLDP protocol messages transmitted or received on all local interfaces. The LLDP Global and Port Statistics screens in Figure 4-12-17
& Figure 4-12-18 appear.
Figure 4-12-17 LLDP Global Statistics Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Buttons
Object
Insertions
Deletions
Drops
Age Outs
: Click to clear the statistics
Description
Shows the number of new entries added since switch reboot.\
Shows the number of new entries deleted since switch reboot.\
Shows the number of LLDP frames dropped due to that the entry table was full.\
Shows the number of entries deleted due to Time-To-Live expiring.\
: Click to refresh the statistics
312
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-12-18 LLDP Port Statistics Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
TX Frame – Total
Description
The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted
The number of LLDP frames transmitted on the port
RX Frame – Total
The number of LLDP frames received on the port
RX Frame – Discarded
If an LLDP frame is received on a port, and the switch's internal table has run full, the LLDP frame is counted and discarded. This situation is known as "Too Many
Neighbors" in the LLDP standard. LLDP frames require a new entry in the table when the Chassis ID or Remote Port ID is not already contained within the table.
Entries are removed from the table when a given port links down, an LLDP shutdown frame is received, or when the entry ages out.
RX Frame – Error
The number of received LLDP frames containing some kind of error.
RX TLVs – Discarded
Each LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information, known as TLVs
(TLV is short for "Type Length Value"). If a TLV is malformed, it is counted and discarded.
The number of well-formed TLVs, but with an unknown type value
RX TLVs –
Unrecognized
RX Ageout - Total
The number of organizationally TLVs received
313
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.13 Diagnostics
This section provide the Physical layer and IP layer network diagnostics tools for troubleshoot. The diagnostic tools are designed for network manager to help them quickly diagnose problems between point to point and better service customers.
Use the Diagnostics menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the Managed Switch. Under System the following topics are provided to configure and view the system information:
This section has the following items:
Cable Diagnostics
Ping Test
IPv6 Ping Test
Trace Route
4.13.1 Cable Diagnostics
The Cable Diagnostics performs tests on copper cables. These functions have the ability to identify the cable length and operating conditions, and to isolate a variety of common faults that can occur on the Cat5 twisted-pair cabling. There might be two statuses as follow:
If the link is established on the twisted-pair interface in 1000Base-T mode, the Cable Diagnostics can run without disruption of the link or of any data transfer.
If the link is established in 100Base-TX or 10Base-T, the Cable Diagnostics cause the link to drop while the diagnostics are running.
After the diagnostics are finished, the link is reestablished. And the following functions are available.
Coupling between cable pairs.
Cable pair termination
Cable
Cable Diagnostics is only accurate for cables of length from 15 to 100 meters.
314
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The Copper test and test result screens in Figure 4-13-1 & Figure 4-13-2 appear.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-13-1 Copper Test Page Screenshot
Buttons
Object
Port
Description
Select port from this drop-down list
: Click to run the diagnostics
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-13-2 Test Results Page Screenshot
Object
Port
Channel A~D
Cable Length A~D
Result
Description
The port where you are requesting Cable Diagnostics
Display the current channel status
Display the current cable length
Display the test result
315
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.13.2 Ping
The ping and IPv6 ping allow you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues. The Managed Switch transmits ICMP packets, and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply.
4.13.3 Ping Test
This page allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues.
After you press “Apply”, ICMP packets are transmitted, and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply. The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received, or until a timeout occurs. The
ICMP Ping screen in Figure 4-13-3 appears.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-13-3 ICMP Ping Page Screenshot
Object
Buttons
IP Address
Count
Interval (in sec)
Size (in bytes)
Ping Results
: Click to transmit ICMP packets.
Description
The destination IP Address
Number of echo requests to send
Send interval for each ICMP packet
The payload size of the ICMP packet. Values range from 8bytes to 5120bytes.
Display the current ping result.
316
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Be sure the target IP Address is within the same network subnet of the switch, or you have to set up the correct gateway IP address.
4.13.4 IPv6 Ping Test
This page allows you to issue ICMPv6 PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues.
After you press “Apply”, 5 ICMPv6 packets are transmitted, and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply. The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received, or until a timeout occurs. The
ICMPv6 Ping screen in Figure 4-13-4 appears.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-13-4 ICMPv6 Ping Page Screenshot
Object
Buttons
IP Address
Count
Interval (in sec)
Size (in bytes)
Ping Results
Description
The destination IPv6 Address
Number of echo requests to send
Send interval for each ICMP packet
The payload size of the ICMP packet. Values range from 8bytes to 5120bytes
Display the current ping result
: Click to transmit ICMPv6 packets
317
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.13.5 Trace Router
Traceroute function is for testing the gateways through which the data packets travel from the source device to the destination device, so to check the network accessibility and locate the network failure.
Execution procedure of the Traceroute function consists of: first a data packet with TTL at 1 is sent to the destination address, if the first hop returns an ICMP error message to inform this packet can not be sent (due to TTL timeout), a data packet with TTL at 2 will be sent. Also the send hop may be a TTL timeout return, but the procedure will carries on till the data packet is sent to its destination. These procedures is for recording every source address which returned ICMP TTL timeout message, so to describe a path the IP data packets traveled to reach the destination. The Trace Route Setting screen in Figure 4-13-5 appears.
Figure 4-13-5 Trace Route Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Description
The destination IP Address
The maximum gateway number allowed by traceroute function
Display the current trace route result
Buttons
Object
IP Address
Max Hop
Trace Route Results
: Click to transmit ICMPv6 packets
318
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.14 RMON
RMON is the most important expansion of the standard SNMP. RMON is a set of MIB definitions, used to define standard network monitor functions and interfaces, enabling the communication between SNMP management terminals and remote monitors. RMON provides a highly efficient method to monitor actions inside the subnets.
MID of RMON consists of 10 groups. The switch supports the most frequently used group 1, 2, 3 and 9:
Statistics: Maintain basic usage and error statistics for each subnet monitored by the Agent.
History: Record periodical statistic samples available from Statistics.
Alarm: Allow management console users to set any count or integer for sample intervals and alert thresholds for
RMON Agent records.
Event: A list of all events generated by RMON Agent.
Alarm depends on the implementation of Event. Statistics and History display some current or history subnet statistics. Alarm and Event provide a method to monitor any integer data change in the network, and provide some alerts upon abnormal events
(sending Trap or record in logs).
4.14.1 RMON Statistics
This page provides a Detail of a specific RMON statistics entry; RMON Statistics screen in Figure 4-14-1 appears.
Figure 4-14-1: RMON Statistics Detail Page Screenshot
319
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The Page includes the following fields:
Object
Port
Description
Select port from this drop-down list
Drop Events
Octets
The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources
The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network
Packets
The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast packets) received
Broadcast Packets
The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address
Multicast Packets
The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address
CRC/Alignment Errors
The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets
Undersize Packets
The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets
Oversize Packets
Fragments
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets
The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC
Jabbers The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid
CRC
The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.
Collisions
Buttons
64 Bytes Frame
65~127 Byte Frames
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets in length
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between
65 to 127 octets in length
128~255 Byte Frames
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between
128 to 255 octets in length
256~511 Byte Frames
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between
256 to 511 octets in length
512~1023 Byte Frames
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between
512 to 1023 octets in length
1024~1518 Byte
Frames
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between
1024 to 1518 octets in length
: Click to clear the RMON statistics
320
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.14.2 RMON Event
Configure RMON Event table on this page. The RMON Event screens in Figure 4-14-2 & Figure 4-14-3 appear.
Figure 4-14-2: RMON Event Configuration Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Select Index
Index
Type
Community
Owner
Description
Description
Select index from this drop-down list to create new index or modify index
Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535
Indicates the notification of the event, the possible types are:
none: The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters.
log: The number of uni-cast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
SNMP-Trap: The number of broad-cast and multi-cast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
Log and Trap: The number of inbound packets that are discarded even the packets are normal.
Specify the community when trap is sent, the string length is from 0 to 127, default is "public".
Indicates the owner of this event, the string length is from 0 to 127, default is a null string
Indicates description of this event, the string length is from 0 to 127, default is a null string
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
321
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-14-3: RMON Event Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Index
Event Type
Community
Description
Last Sent Time
Owner
Action
Description
Display the current event index
Display the current event type
Display the current community for SNMP trap
Display the current event description
Display the current last sent time
Display the current event owner
Click to delete RMON event entry
4.14.3 RMON Event Log
This page provides an overview of RMON Event Log. The RMON Event Log Table screen in Figure 4-14-4 appears.
Figure 4-14-4: RMON Event Log Table Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Select Index
Index
Log Time
Description
Description
Select index from this drop-down list
Indicates the index of the log entry
Indicates Event log time
Indicates the Event description
322
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.14.4 RMON Alarm
Configure RMON Alarm table on this page. The RMON Alarm screens in Figure 4-14-5 & Figure 4-14-6 appear.
Figure 4-14-5: RMON Alarm Table Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Select Index
Index
Sample Port
Sample Variable
Description
Select index from this drop-down list to create the new index or modify the index
Indicates the index of the alarm entry
Select port from this drop-down list
Indicates the particular variable to be sampled, the possible variables are:
DropEvents: The total number of events in which packets were dropped due to lack of resources.
Octets: The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) bytes.
Includes FCS, but excludes framing bits.
Pkts: The total number of frames (bad, broadcast and multicast) received and transmitted.
BroadcastPkts: The total number of good frames received that were directed to the broadcast address. Note that this does not include multicast packets.
MulticastPkts: The total number of good frames received that were directed
323
Sample Interval
Sample Type
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
to this multicast address.
CRCAlignErrors: The number of CRC/alignment errors (FCS or alignment errors).
UnderSizePkts: The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets long(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
OverSizePkts: The total number of frames received that were longer than
1518 octets(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
Fragments: The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and had either an FCS or alignment error.
Jabbers: The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and had either an
FCS or alignment error.
Collisions: The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this
Ethernet segment.
Pkts64Octets: The total number of frames (including bad packets) received and transmitted that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
Pkts64to172Octets: The total number of frames (including bad packets) received and transmitted where the number of octets falls within the specified range (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
Pkts158to255Octets: The total number of frames (including bad packets) received and transmitted where the number of octets falls within the specified range (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
Pkts256to511Octets: The total number of frames (including bad packets) received and transmitted where the number of octets falls within the specified range (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
Pkts512to1023Octets: The total number of frames (including bad packets) received and transmitted where the number of octets falls within the specified range (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
Pkts1024to1518Octets: The total number of frames (including bad packets) received and transmitted where the number of octets falls within the specified range (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
Sample interval (1–2147483647)
The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds, possible sample types are:
Absolute: Get the sample directly (default).
324
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Buttons
Rising Threshold
Falling Threshold
Rising Event
Falling Event
Owner
: Click to apply changes.
Delta: Calculate the difference between samples.
Rising threshold value (0–2147483647)
Falling threshold value (0–2147483647)
Event to fire when the rising threshold is crossed
Event to fire when the falling threshold is crossed
Specify an owner for the alarm
Figure 4-14-6: RMON Alarm Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Index
Sample Port
Sample Variable
Sample Interval
Sample Type
Rising Threshold
Falling Threshold
Rising Event
Falling Event
Owner
Action
Description
Indicates the index of Alarm control entry
Display the current sample port
Display the current sample variable
Display the current interval
Display the current sample type
Display the current rising threshold
Display the current falling threshold
Display the current rising event
Display the current falling event
Display the current owner
Click to delete RMON alarm entry
325
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.14.5 RMON History
Configure RMON History table on this page. The RMON History screens in Figure 4-14-7 & Figure 4-14-8 appear.
Figure 4-14-7: RMON History Table Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Select Index
Index
Sample Port
Bucket Requested
Interval
Buttons
Owner
: Click to apply changes.
Description
Select index from this drop-down list to create the new index or modify the index
Indicates the index of the history entry
Select port from this drop-down list
Indicates the maximum data entries associated this History control entry stored in
RMON. The range is from 1 to 50, default value is 50
Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling the history statistics data. The range is from 1 to 3600, default value is 1800 seconds.
Specify an owner for the history
Figure 4-14-8: RMON History Status Page Screenshot
326
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Index
Data Source
Bucket Requested
Interval
Owner
Action
Description
Display the current index
Display the current data source
Display the current bucket requested
Display the current interval
Display the current owner
Click to delete RMON history entry.
4.14.6 RMON History Log
This page provides a detail of RMON history entries; screen in Figure 4-14-9 appears.
Figure 4-14-9: RMON History Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Buttons
Object
History Index
Description
Select history index from this drop-down list
: Click to apply changes.
327
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.15 Power over Ethernet
The WGS PoE Managed Switch Series can easily build a power central-controlled IP phone system, IP camera system and AP group for the enterprise. For instance, cameras / APs can be easily installed around the corner in the company for surveillance demands or build a wireless roaming environment in the office. Without the power-socket limitation, the WGS PoE Managed
Switch Series makes the installation of cameras or WLAN APs easier and more efficient.
PoE Power Budget list for WGS PoE Managed switch series
Model Name
WGS-804HPT
PoE Budget
144 watts
Figure 4-16-1: Power over Ethernet Status
328
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.15.1 Power over Ethernet Powered Device
3~5 watts
6~12 watts
Voice over IP phones
Enterprise can install POE VoIP Phone, ATA and other
Ethernet/non-Ethernet end-devices in the central area where UPS is installed for un-interruptible power system and power control system.
Wireless LAN Access Points
Museums, sightseeing spots, airports, hotels, campuses, factories, and warehouses can install the Access Point anywhere.
10~12 watts
3~12 watts
3~25 watts
IP Surveillance
Enterprises, museums, campuses, hospitals and banks can install IP camera without the limit of the installation location. Electrician is not needed to install AC sockets.
PoE Splitter
PoE Splitter splits the PoE 56V DC over the Ethernet cable into 5/12V DC power output. It frees the device deployment from restrictions due to power outlet locations, which eliminate the costs for additional AC wiring and reduces the installation time.
High Power PoE Splitter
High PoE Splitter splits the PoE 56V DC over the Ethernet cable into
24/12V DC power output. It frees the device deployment from restrictions due to power outlet locations, which eliminate the costs for additional AC wiring and reduces the installation time.
High Power Speed Dome
This state-of-the-art design is considerable to fit in various network environments like traffic centers, shopping malls, railway stations, warehouses, airports, and production facilities for the most demanding outdoor surveillance applications. Electrician is not needed to install AC sockets.
30 watts
Since the WGS PoE Managed Switch Series per PoE port supports 48~56V DC PoE power output, please check and assure the Powered Device’s (PD) acceptable DC power range is 48~56V DC; otherwise, it will damage the Powered Device (PD).
329
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.15.2 System Configuration
In a power over Ethernet system, operating power is applied from a power source (PSU-power supply unit) over the LAN infrastructure to powered devices (PDs), which are connected to ports. Under some conditions, the total output power required by PDs can exceed the maximum available power provided by the PSU. The system with a PSU is capable of supplying less power than the total potential power consumption of all the PoE ports in the system. In order to maintain the function of the majority of the ports, power management is implemented.
The PSU input power consumption is monitored by measuring voltage and current .The input power consumption is equal to the system’s aggregated power consumption .The power management concept allows all ports to be active and activates additional ports, as long as the aggregated power of the system is lower than the power level at which additional PDs cannot be connected .When this value is exceeded, ports will be deactivated, according to user-defined priorities. The power budget is managed according to the following user-definable parameters: maximum available power, ports priority and maximum allowable power per port.
Reserved Power
There are five modes for configuring how the ports/PDs may reserve power and when to shut down ports.
Classification mode
In this mode each port automatic determines how much power to reserve according to the class the connected PD belongs to, and reserves the power accordingly. Four different port classes exist and one for 4, 7, 15.4 and 30.8 watts.
Class
0
1
2
3
4
Usage
Default
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Range of maximum power used by the PD
0.44 to 12.95 watts
0.44 to 3.84 watts
3.84 to 6.49 watts
6.49 to 12.95 watts (or to 15.4 watts)
12.95 to 25.50 watts (or to 30.8 watts)
Class Description
Classification unimplement
Very low power
Low power
Mid power
High power
Table 4-16-1: Standard PoE Parameters and Comparison
1. In this mode the Maximum Power fields have no effect.
2. The PoE chip of PD69004 designed to that Class level 0 will be assigned to 15.4 watts in
AF mode and 30.8 watts in AT mode under classification power limit mode. It is hardware limited.
Allocation mode
In this mode, the user allocates the amount of power that each port may reserve. The allocated/reserved power for each port/PD is specified in the Maximum Power fields. The ports are shut down when total reserved power exceeds the amount of power that the power supply can deliver.
330
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
In this mode, the port power is not turned on if the PD requests more available power.
4.15.3 Power over Ethernet Configuration
This section allows the user to inspect and configure the current PoE configuration setting
as screen in Figure 4-16-1 appears.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-16-1: PoE Configuration Screenshot
Object
System PoE Admin
Mode
PoE Management
Mode
Temperature
Threshold
PoE Temperature
Power Budget
Description
Allows user to enable or disable PoE function. It will cause all of PoE ports to supply or not to supply power.
There are six modes for configuring how the ports/PDs may reserve power and when to shut down ports.
Classification mode: The system reserves PoE power to PD according to
PoE class level.
Consumption mode: The system offers PoE power according to PD real power consumption.
Allocation mode: Users allow to assign how much PoE power to each port and the system will reserve PoE power to PD.
Allows setting over temperature protection threshold value. If the system temperature is overly high, the system will lower the total PoE power budget automatically.
Display the PoE Chip Temperature
Allows user to configure PoE power budget.
331
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
This section displays the PoE Power Usage of Current Power Consumption as
Figure 4-16-2 shows.
Figure 4-16-2: Current Power Consumption Screenshot
This section allows the user to inspect and configure the current PoE port settings
as Figure 4-16-3 shows.
Figure 4-16-3: Power over Ethernet Configuration Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
PoE Mode
Schedule
AF/AT Mode
Description
There are three modes for PoE mode.
Enable: enable PoE function..
Disable: disable PoE function.
Schedule: enable PoE function in schedule mode.
Indicates the scheduled profile mode. Possible profiles are:
Profile1
Profile2
Profile3
Profile4
Allows user to select 802.3at or 802.3af compatibility mode. The default value is
802.3at mode.
This function will affect PoE power reservation in Classification power limit mode only, as 802.3af mode, the system is going to reserve a maximum of 15.4W for
332
Buttons
Priority
PD Class
Current Used [mA]
Power Used [W]
Power Allocation
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
PD that supports Class3 level. As IEEE 802.3at mode, the system is going to reserve 30.8 watts for PD that supports Class4 level.
From class1 to class3 level in the 802.3at mode, it will reserve the same PoE power as in 802.3af mode.
The Priority represents PoE ports priority. There are three levels of power priority named Low, High and Critical.
The priority is used in case the total power consumption is over the total power budget. In this case the port with the lowest priority will be turned off, and offer power for the port of higher priority.
Displays the class of the PD attached to the port, as established by the classification process. Class 0 is the default for PDs. The PD is powered based on PoE Class level if the system is working in Classification mode. The PD will return to Class 0 to 4 in accordance with the maximum power draw as specified by
Table 4-16-1
.
The Power Used shows how much current the PD currently is using.
The Power Used shows how much power the PD currently is using.
It can limit the port PoE supply watts. Per port maximum value must be less than 30.8 watts. Total port values must be less than the Power Reservation value. Once power overload is detected, the port will auto shut down and keep in detection mode until PD’s power consumption is lower than the power limit value
: Click to apply changes.
333
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.15.4 PoE Schedule
This page allows the user to define PoE schedule and scheduled power recycling.
PoE Schedule
Besides being used as an IP Surveillance, the Managed PoE switch is certainly applicable to construct any PoE network including VoIP and Wireless LAN. Under the trend of energy saving worldwide and contributing to the environmental protection on the Earth, the Managed PoE switch can effectively control the power supply besides its capability of giving high watts power.
The “PoE schedule” function helps you to enable or disable PoE power feeding for each PoE port during specified time intervals and it is a powerful function to help SMB or Enterprise saving power and money.
Scheduled Power Recycling
The Managed PoE switch allows each of the connected PoE IP cameras to reboot at a specified time each week. Therefore, it will reduce the chance of IP camera crash resulting from buffer overflow.
334
The screen in Figure 4-16-4 appears.
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Figure 4-16-4: PoE Schedule Screenshot
Please press Add New Rule button to start setting PoE Schedule function. You have to set PoE schedule to profile and then go back to PoE Port Configuration, and select “Schedule” mode from per port “PoE Mode” option to enable you to indicate which schedule profile could be applied to the PoE port.
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Profile
Week Day
Start Hour
Description
Set the schedule profile mode. Possible profiles are:
Profile1
Profile2
Profile3
Profile4
Allows user to set week day for defining PoE function by enabling it on the day.
Allows user to set what hour PoE function does by enabling it.
335
Start Min
End Hour
End Min
Reboot Enable
Reboot Only
Buttons
Reboot Hour
Reboot Min
: Click to add new rule.
: Click to apply changes
: Check to delete the entry.
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Allows user to set what minute PoE function does by enabling it.
Allows user to set what hour PoE function does by disabling it.
Allows user to set what minute PoE function does by disabling it.
Allows user to enable or disable the whole PoE port reboot by PoE reboot schedule.
Please note that if you want PoE schedule and PoE reboot schedule to work at the same time, please use this function, and don’t use Reboot Only function. This function offers administrator to reboot PoE device at an indicated time if administrator has this kind of requirement.
Allows user to reboot PoE function by PoE reboot schedule. Please note that if administrator enables this function, PoE schedule will not set time to profile. This function is just for PoE port to reset at an indicated time.
Allows user to set what hour PoE reboots. This function is only for PoE reboot schedule.
Allows user to set what minute PoE reboots. This function is only for PoE reboot schedule.
336
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.15.5 PoE Alive Check Configuration
The WGS PoE Managed Switch Series can be configured to monitor connected PD’s status in real-time via ping action. Once the PD stops working and without response, the PoE Switch is going to restart PoE port power, and bring the PD back to work. It will greatly enhance the reliability and reduces administrator management burden.
This page provides you with how to configure PD Alive Check. The screen in Figure 4-16-5 appears.
Figure 4-15-5: PD Alive Check Configuration Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Mode
Ping PD IP Address
Description
Allows user to enable or disable per port PD Alive Check function.
By default, all ports are disabled.
This column allows user to set PoE device IP address for system making ping to the
PoE device. Please note that the PD’s IP address must be set to the same network segment with the PoE Switch.
337
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
Buttons
Interval Time (10~300s)
This column allows user to set how long system should issue a ping request to PD for detecting whether PD is alive or dead.
Retry Count (1~5)
Interval time range is from 10 seconds to 300 seconds.
This column allows user to set the number of times system retries ping to PD.
For example, if we set count 2, it means that if system retries ping to the PD and the
PD doesn’t response continuously, the PoE port will be reset.
Action
Allows user to set which action will be applied if the PD is without any response. The
PoE Switch Series offers the following 3 actions:
PD Reboot: It means system will reset the PoE port that is connected to the
PD.
PD Reboot & Alarm: It means system will reset the PoE port and issue an alarm message via Syslog.
Alarm: It means system will issue an alarm message via Syslog.
Reboot Time (30~180s)
This column allows user to set the PoE device rebooting time as there are so many kinds of PoE devices on the market and they have a different rebooting time.
The PD Alive-check is not a defining standard, so the PoE device on the market doesn’t report reboot done information to the PoE Switch. Thus, user has to make sure how long the PD will take to finish booting, and then set the time value to this column.
System is going to check the PD again according to the reboot time. If you are not sure of the precise booting time, we suggest you set it longer.
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-15-6: PD Alive Check Configuration Screenshot
338
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.16 Maintenance
Use the Maintenance menu items to display and configure basic configurations of the Managed Switch. Under maintenance, the following topics are provided to back up, upgrade, save and restore the configuration. This section has the following items:
■
Factory Default
■
Reboot Switch
You can reset the configuration of the switch on this page.
■
■
Backup Manager
Upgrade Manager
You can restart the switch on this page. After restart, the switch will boot normally.
You can back up the switch configuration.
You can upgrade the switch configuration.
■
Dual Image
Select active or backup image on this Page.
4.16.1 Factory Default
You can reset the configuration of the switch on this page. Only the IP configuration is retained. The new configuration is available immediately, which means that no restart is necessary. The Factory Default screen in Figure 4-15-1 appears and click to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults.
Figure 4-15-1 Factory Default Page Screenshot
After the “Factory” button is pressed and rebooted, the system will load the default IP settings as follows:
。
Default IP address: 192.168.0.100
。
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
。
Default Gateway: 192.168.0.254
。
The other setting value is back to disable or none.
To reset the Managed Switch to the Factory default setting, you can also press the hardware reset button at the front panel about 10 seconds. After the device be rebooted. You can login the management WEB interface within the same subnet of 192.168.0.xx.
339
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.16.2 Reboot Switch
The Reboot page enables the device to be rebooted from a remote location. Once the Reboot button is pressed, user has to re-login the Web interface for about 60 seconds. The Reboot Switch screen in Figure 4-16-2 appears and click to reboot the system.
Figure 4-16-2 Reboot Switch Page Screenshot
4.16.3 Backup Manager
This function allows backup of the current image or configuration of the Managed Switch to the local management station. The
Backup Manager screen in Figure 4-16-3 appears.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-16-3 Backup Manager Page Screenshot
Description
Select backup method from this drop-down list.
Fill in your TFTP server IP address.
Select backup type.
Select active or backup image.
Buttons
Object
Backup Method
Server IP
Backup Type
Image
: Click to back up image, configuration or log.
340
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.16.4 Upgrade Manager
This function allows reloading of the current image or configuration of the Managed Switch to the local management station. The
Upgrade Manager screen in Figure 4-16-4 appears.
Figure 4-16-4 Upgrade Manager Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Description
Select upgrade method from this drop-down list.
Fill in your TFTP server IP address.
The name of firmware image or configuration.
Select upgrade type.
Select active or backup image.
Buttons
Object
Upgrade Method
Server IP
File Name
Upgrade Type
Image
: Click to upgrade image or configuration.
341
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4.16.5 Dual Image
This page provides information about the active and backup firmware images in the device, and allows you to revert to the backup image. The web page displays two tables with information about the active and backup firmware images. The Dual
Image Configuration and Information screens in Figure 4-16-5 & Figure 4-16-6 appear.
Figure 4-15-5: Dual Image Configuration Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Buttons
Active Image
Description
Select the active or backup image
: Click to apply active image.
Figure 4-16-6: Dual Image Information Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Flash Partition
Image Name
Description
Display the current flash partition
Display the current image name
342
Image Size
Created Time
Display the current image size
Display the created time
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
343
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
5. SWITCH OPERATION
5.1 Address Table
The Switch is implemented with an address table. This address table is composed of many entries. Each entry is used to store the address information of some nodes on the network, including MAC address, port no, etc. This information comes from the learning process of Ethernet Switch.
5.2 Learning
When one packet comes in from any port, the Switch will record the source address, port number and the other related information in the address table. This information will be used to decide either forwarding or filtering for future packets.
5.3 Forwarding & Filtering
When one packet comes from some port of the Ethernet Switching, it will also check the destination address besides the source address learning. The Ethernet Switching will look up the address table for the destination address. If not found, this packet will be forwarded to all the other ports except the port, which this packet comes in. And these ports will transmit this packet to the network it connected. If found, and the destination address is located at a different port from this packet comes in, the Ethernet
Switching will forward this packet to the port where this destination address is located according to the information from the address table. But, if the destination address is located at the same port with this packet, then this packet will be filtered, thereby increasing the network throughput and availability
5.4 Store-and-Forward
Store-and-Forward is one type of packet-forwarding techniques. A Store-and-Forward Ethernet Switching stores the incoming frame in an internal buffer and does the complete error checking before transmission. Therefore, no error packets occur. It is the best choice when a network needs efficiency and stability.
The Ethernet Switch scans the destination address from the packet-header, searches the routing table provided for the incoming port and forwards the packet, only if required. The fast forwarding makes the switch attractive for connecting servers directly to the network, thereby increasing throughput and availability. However, the switch is most commonly used to segment existence hubs, which nearly always improves the overall performance. An Ethernet Switching can be easily configured in any Ethernet network environment to significantly boost bandwidth using the conventional cabling and adapters.
Due to the learning function of the Ethernet switching, the source address and corresponding port number of each incoming and outgoing packet is stored in a routing table. This information is subsequently used to filter packets whose destination address is on the same segment as the source address. This confines network traffic to its respective domain and reduces the overall load on the network.
The Switch performs "Store and forward"; therefore, no error packets occur. More reliably, it reduces the re-transmission rate.
344
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
No packet loss will occur.
5.5 Auto-Negotiation
The STP ports on the Switch have a built-in "Auto-negotiation". This technology automatically sets the best possible bandwidth when a connection is established with another network device (usually at Power On or Reset). This is done by detecting the modes and speeds when both devices are connected. Both 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX devices can connect with the port in either half- or full-duplex mode.
If attached device is:
10Mbps, without auto-negotiation
10Mbps, with auto-negotiation
100Mbps, without auto-negotiation
100Mbps, with auto-negotiation
100BASE-TX port will set to:
10Mbps.
10/20Mbps (10BASE-T/full-duplex)
100Mbps
100/200Mbps (100BASE-TX/full-duplex)
345
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
6. TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter contains information to help you solve your issue. If the Managed Switch is not functioning properly, make sure the
Managed Switch is set up according to instructions in this manual.
■
The Link LED is not lit
Solution:
Check the cable connection and remove duplex mode of the Managed Switch
■
Some stations cannot talk to other stations located on the other port
Solution:
Please check the VLAN settings, trunk settings, or port enabled / disabled status.
■
Performance is bad
Solution:
Check the full duplex status of the Managed Switch. If the Managed Switch is set to full duplex and the partner is set to half duplex, then the performance will be poor. Please also check the in/out rate of the port.
■
Why the Switch doesn't connect to the network
Solution:
1.
2.
Check the LNK/ACT LED on the Managed Switch
Try another port on the Managed Switch
3.
4.
5.
Make sure the cable is installed properly
Make sure the cable is the right type
Turn off the power. After a while, turn on power again
■
100BASE-TX port link LED is lit, but the traffic is irregular
Solution:
Check that the attached device is not set to full duplex. Some devices use a physical or software switch to change duplex modes. Auto-negotiation may not recognize this type of full-duplex setting.
■
Switch does not power up
Solution:
1. AC power cord is not inserted or faulty
2. Check whether the AC power cord is inserted correctly
3. Replace the power cord if the cord is inserted correctly. Check whether the AC power source is working by connecting a different device in place of the switch.
346
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
4. If that device works, refer to the next step.
5. If that device does not work, check the AC power
■
Why the PoE Ethernet Switch doesn’t connect to the network
Solution:
Check the LNK/ACT LED on the PoE Ethernet Switch. Try another port on the PoE Ethernet Switch. Make sure the cable is installed properly and make sure the cable is the right type. Turn off the power. After a while, turn on power again.
■
When I connect my PoE device to PoE Ethernet Switch, it cannot be powered on
Solution:
1. Please check the cable type of the connection from the PoE Ethernet Switch (port 1 to port 8) to the other end. The cable should be an 8-wire UTP, Category 5 or above, EIA568 cable within 100 meters. A cable with only 4-wire, short loop or over 100 meters will affect the power supply.
2. Please check and assure the device is fully complied with IEEE 802.3af / 802.3at standard.
347
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
APPENDIX A Switch's RJ45 Pin Assignments
A.1 1000Mbps, 1000BASE-T
Contact MDI MDI-X
1 BI_DA+ BI_DB+
2 BI_DA- BI_DB-
3 BI_DB+ BI_DA+
4 BI_DC+ BI_DD+
5 BI_DC- BI_DD-
6 BI_DB- BI_DA-
7 BI_DD+ BI_DC+
8 BI_DD- BI_DC-
Implicit implementation of the crossover function within a twisted-pair cable, or at a wiring panel, while not expressly forbidden, is beyond the scope of this standard.
A.2 10/100Mbps, 10/100BASE-TX
When connecting your 10/100Mbps Ethernet Switch to another switch, a bridge or a hub, a straight or crossover cable is necessary. Each port of the Switch supports auto-MDI/MDI-X detection. That means you can directly connect the Switch to any
Ethernet devices without making a crossover cable. The following table and diagram show the standard RJ45 receptacle/ connector and their pin assignments:
Contact
1
2
3
4, 5
6
7, 8
RJ45 Connector pin assignment
MDI
Media Dependent Interface
MDI-X
Media Dependent
Interface-Cross
Tx + (transmit)
Tx - (transmit)
Rx + (receive)
Rx - (receive)
Rx + (receive)
Not used
Rx - (receive)
Not used
Tx + (transmit)
Tx - (transmit)
348
User’s Manual of WGS Managed Series
The standard cable, RJ45 pin assignment
The standard RJ45 receptacle/connector
There are 8 wires on a standard UTP/STP cable and each wire is color-coded. The following shows the pin allocation and color of straight cable and crossover cable connection:
Straight-through Cable SIDE 1 SIDE 2
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
SIDE 1 1 = White / Orange
2 = Orange
3 = White / Green
4 = Blue
5 = White / Blue
6 = Green
7 = White / Brown
8 = Brown
1 = White / Orange
2 = Orange
3 = White / Green
4 = Blue
5 = White / Blue
6 = Green
7 = White / Brown
8 = Brown
Crossover Cable
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SIDE 2
SIDE 1
SIDE 1
1 = White / Orange
2 = Orange
3 = White / Green
SIDE 2
1 = White / Green
2 = Green
3 = White / Orange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4 = Blue
5 = White / Blue
6 = Green
7 = White / Brown
4 = Blue
5 = White / Blue
6 = Orange
7 = White / Brown
8 = Brown
Please make sure your connected cables are with the same pin assignment and color as the above table before deploying the cables into your network.
SIDE 2 8 = Brown
Figure A-1: Straight-through and Crossover Cable
349
advertisement